summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 04:49:29 -0700
committerRoger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org>2025-10-15 04:49:29 -0700
commitd0af31685f36e8e48a3b460282860ff705586eb8 (patch)
tree67769d9576389da8c575d33c7452451857e076ea
initial commit of ebook 16704HEADmain
-rw-r--r--.gitattributes3
-rw-r--r--16704.txt7264
-rw-r--r--16704.zipbin0 -> 150147 bytes
-rw-r--r--LICENSE.txt11
-rw-r--r--README.md2
5 files changed, 7280 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6833f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitattributes
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+* text=auto
+*.txt text
+*.md text
diff --git a/16704.txt b/16704.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8dd618b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16704.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,7264 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, Adventures in Southern Seas, by George Forbes
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: Adventures in Southern Seas
+ A Tale of the Sixteenth Century
+
+
+Author: George Forbes
+
+
+
+Release Date: September 16, 2005 [eBook #16704]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ADVENTURES IN SOUTHERN SEAS***
+
+
+E-text prepared by James Tenison
+
+
+
+ADVENTURES IN SOUTHERN SEAS
+
+A Tale of the Sixteenth Century
+
+by
+
+GEORGE FORBES
+
+First published August 1920 by George
+G. Harrap & Co. Ltd. 39-41 Parker
+Street, Kingsway, London, W.C.2
+Reprinted July 1924
+Printed in Great Britain by Neill & Co. Ltd., Edinburgh
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTORY
+
+In the year 1801 was found by the chief coxswain of the "Naturalist" (a
+ship commanded by Captain Hamelin on a voyage of discovery performed by
+order of the Emperor Napoleon I), at Shark's Bay, on the coast of West
+Australia, a pewter plate about six inches in diameter, bearing a
+roughly engraved Dutch inscription, of which the following is a
+translation:
+
+ "1616
+
+ "On the 25th of October arrived here the ship 'Endraght',
+ of Amsterdam; first supercargo Gilles Miebas Van Luck;
+ Captain Dirk Hartog, of Amsterdam. She set sail again
+ on the 27th of the same month. Bantum was second
+ supercargo; Janstins first pilot.
+
+ "Peter Ecoores Van Bu, in the year 1616."
+
+No connected account of the voyages of Dirk Hartog is extant, but the
+report of the discovery of this pewter plate suggested the task of
+compiling a narrative from the records kept by Dutch navigators, in
+which Dirk Hartog is frequently referred to, and which is probably as
+correct a history of Hartog's voyages as can be obtained. The
+aborigines of New Holland, as Australia was then called, judging by the
+description given of them by Van Bu, the author of the writing on the
+pewter plate, appear to have been a more formidable race of savages
+than those subsequently met with by Captain Cook on his landing at
+Botany Bay, and the dimensions of the tribe among whom Van Bu was held
+captive were certainly larger than those of the migratory tribes of
+Australian blacks in more modern times. The "sea spider" described by
+Van Bu in his second adventure was probably the octopus, which attains
+to great size in the Pacific. The "hopping animals" are doubtless the
+kangaroos, with which Australians are now familiar.
+
+Captain Dampier, in 1699, first mentions the water serpents referred to
+by Van Bu. "In passing," he says, "we saw three water serpents swimming
+about in the sea, of a yellow colour, spotted with dark brown spots.
+Next day we saw two water serpents, different in shape from such as we
+had formerly seen; one very long and as big as a man's leg in girth,
+having a red head, which I have never seen any before or since."
+
+From an examination of the Dutch records, it would appear that a ship
+named the "Arms of Amsterdam" drove past the south coast of New Guinea
+in the year 1623. This is, perhaps, the voyage described by Van Bu to
+the Island of Gems. The gigantic mass of ice seen by Van Bu in the South
+is particularly interesting, since it may have been the first sight of
+the ice barrier from which glaciers in the Antarctic regions break off
+into the sea.
+
+The north portion of New Guinea was for the first time rightly explored
+in the year 1678, by order of the Dutch East India Company, and found
+almost everywhere to be enriched with very fine rivers, lakes, and
+bays. About the north-western parts the natives were discovered to be
+lean, and of middle size, jet-black, not unlike the Malabars, but the
+hair of the head shorter and somewhat less curly than the Kafirs'. "In
+the black of their eyes," says a report given of this voyage, "gleams a
+certain tint of red, by which may, in some measure, be observed that
+blood-thirsty nature of theirs which has at different times caused so
+much grief from the loss of several of our young men, whom they have
+surprised, murdered, carried into the woods, and there devoured. They
+go entirely naked, without the least shame, except their rajahs or
+petty kings, who are richly dressed. The heathens of Nova Guinea
+believe there is some divinity in serpents, for which reason they
+represent them upon their vessels."
+
+The "Golden Sea-horse" is mentioned as one of the Dutch ships said to
+have taken part in the discovery of Australia between the years 1616
+and 1624. Other vessels noted are the "Endraght", "Zeewolf", "Arms of
+Amsterdam", "Pera", and "Arnheim". All these vessels lay claim to
+having touched at the 'Great Southern Continent' as well as at the
+islands of the South Seas.
+
+The 'Place of the Painted Hands', the objective of the third voyage of
+Van Bu with Dirk Hartog to New Holland, is referred to by the late Mr
+Lawrence Hargrave, who made a very interesting study of picture-writings
+discovered in Australia, in a collection of pamphlets entitled "Lope de
+Vega", now in the possession of the Mitchell Library at Sydney. "There
+are picture-writings," he says, "which have remained for hundreds of
+years without any archaeologist discovering their meaning. They are
+not as ancient as those on the monuments of the Egyptians, but they are
+equally interesting. If they are read in the light of a message to
+posterity, they may yet reveal something of surprising interest. By whom
+were they chiselled? What is their meaning? The more recent discoveries
+show an oval encircling a cross--the symbol of Spanish conquest. On an
+ironstone rock-face on the Shoalhaven River are many 'hands.' These have
+been there to the memory of the oldest inhabitant. No aboriginal will go
+near them. Gold is still washed in this river, and possibly these
+hands, or fingers, refer to the days worked here washing gold, or to the
+number of 'quills' of gold obtained. You will understand these 'hands'
+are not carved, but painted with some pigment that has withstood the
+weather for some hundreds of years."
+
+The Malays locate the Male and Female Islands visited by Van Bu, an
+account of which appears in many ancient manuscripts from the twelfth
+to the sixteenth century, as being the islands of Engarno, to the south
+of Sumatra. Marco Polo speaks of them in his voyage round the world,
+undertaken in 1271, and both Spanish and Dutch explorers refer to them
+in the accounts of their travels of more recent date.
+
+In "The Discovery of Australia" (a critical documentary and historic
+investigation concerning the priority of discovery in Australasia by
+Europeans before the arrival of Lieutenant James Cook in the Endeavour
+in the year 1770), by George Collingridge, may be found accounts of
+Spanish and Portuguese attempts at settlement upon the Great Southern
+Continent--'Terra Australis'.
+
+Staten Land was the name first given to New Zealand in honour of the
+States of Holland, and the monstrous birds seen there were probably the
+now extinct moa. The Cannibal Islands are doubtless Fiji. The data and
+references to chronicles in this work are genuine, and the result of a
+careful study of rare and (in some cases) unique books and manuscripts
+in the Mitchell Wing of the Public Library at Sydney, said to be the
+most comprehensive collection known of accounts of discoveries in South
+Seas.
+
+G. F.
+
+
+
+CONTENTS
+
+CHAPTER
+
+
+I. I FALL INTO CAPTIVITY
+II. THE BLACK CANNIBALS OF NEW HOLLAND
+III. THE ONLY WHITE MAN IN NEW HOLLAND
+IV. THE SEA SPIDER
+V. THE VOYAGE CONTINUED
+VI. THE FIGHT ON THE SANDS
+VII. THE SPIRIT OF DISCORD
+VIII. PEARL ISLAND
+IX. MUTINY
+X. I EMBARK ON A SECOND VOYAGE
+XI. A SECOND VOYAGE WITH HARTOG TO THE SOUTH
+XII. THE SEA SERPENT
+XIII. THE FLOATING ISLAND
+XIV. AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE
+XV. THE SEAWEED SEA
+XVI. THE ISLAND OF GEMS
+XVII. QUEEN MELANNIE
+XVIII. A QUEEN'S FAVOURITE
+XIX. I BECOME CHIEF COOK
+XX. THE SNAKE GOD
+XXI. A PLAN OF ESCAPE
+XXII. THE NIGHT OF THE SACRIFICE
+XXIII. AT THE MERCY OF THE SEA
+XXIV. HOW MY SECOND VOYAGE ENDED
+XXV. I ARRIVE AT AMSTERDAM
+XXVI. HAPPILY MARRIED
+XXVII. ONCE MORE TO THE SOUTH
+XXVIII. THE MOLUCCA ISLANDS
+XXIX. THE VOYAGE CONTINUED
+XXX. A SPANISH SETTLEMENT
+XXXI. THE PLACE OF THE PAINTED HANDS
+XXXII. MAROONED
+XXXIII. CAPTAIN MONTBAR
+XXXIV. WE AGAIN EXPLORE THE CAVES
+XXXV. I AM KIDNAPPED
+XXXVI. THE MALE AND FEMALE ISLANDS
+XXXVII. A TASK IS SET ME
+XXXVIII. THE SLAYING OF THE GREAT CROCODILE
+XXXIX. I BECOME A VICTIM OF DOMESTIC INFELICITY
+XL. THE YELLOW PARCHMENT
+XLI. THE RUBY MOUNTAINS
+XLII. THE VALLEY OF SERPENTS
+XLIII. WE AGAIN LEAVE NEW HOLLAND
+XLIV. THE ISLANDS OF ARMENIO
+XLV. SUMATRA
+XLVI. MAHOMET ACHMET
+XLVII. KING TRINKITAT
+XLVIII. STATEN LAND
+XLIX. THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS
+L. AGAIN AT THE MOLUCCAS
+LI. GETTING BACK OUR OWN
+LII. CONCLUSION
+
+
+
+
+
+ADVENTURES IN SOUTHERN SEAS
+
+
+
+CHAPTER I
+
+I FALL INTO CAPTIVITY
+
+
+Let those who read this narrative doubt not its veracity. There be much
+in Nature that we wot not of, and many strange countries to explore.
+The monsters who roamed the earth in ancient times, as their fossil
+bones attest, are still to be seen in those regions hitherto unvisited
+by white men, and in the fathomless depths of uncharted seas leviathans
+find a home.
+
+Peter Ecoores Van Bu was born upon the island of Urk, in the Zuider
+Zee, in the year 1596, and was brought up a fisher-lad until the coming
+to the island of a priest, to whom my parents, ambitious for my
+advancement, entrusted my education in the arts of reading and writing,
+accomplishments in little vogue at this time. Hence it comes that I am
+able to set down here a record of perils and adventures by sea and land
+which may prove entertaining reading to those who have never travelled
+beyond the limits of their own countries.
+
+My parents, who had stinted themselves to provide my education, placed
+me when I was eighteen years old in a merchant's office at Amsterdam,
+where I became acquainted with Dirk Hartog, a famous navigator, who, a
+year later, invited me to become his secretary and engraver of charts
+on board the ship "Endraght", being then commissioned for a voyage of
+discovery to the South, and having obtained a reluctant consent from my
+master, De Decker, the merchant, to Hartog's proposal I gladly
+abandoned the office desk for the sea.
+
+The discovery of America by Christopher Columbus in 1492 had given rise
+to a theory that a vast continent known as Terra Australis existed in
+the South, and Portuguese and Spanish ships had made report from time
+to time of this southern land. It was to confirm or dispel this belief
+that the voyage of Dirk Hartog was made.
+
+For many months after leaving Amsterdam we sailed south, touching at
+some islands to obtain vegetable food and replenish our water-casks.
+Worn out with hardship, our crew more than once showed signs of mutiny.
+Sometimes for weeks together we lay becalmed in the tropics, when the
+air hung like a pall of vapour from the sky, and the pitch boiled and
+blistered in the seams of the deck-planks. In other seasons we were
+driven by storm and stress. But at length, in spite of every obstacle,
+an unbroken coast stretched before us far as the eye could reach. For
+three days we sailed past verdure-covered hills, white, sandy beaches,
+and bluff headlands, until Hartog felt assured the Great South
+Continent was at last in very truth before him.
+
+The day upon which Hartog determined to land was bright and fine; the
+place a sandy beach upon which the waves broke in frothy spume. We were
+all keen to be ashore after so long a spell of the sea, and I reckoned
+myself in luck to be chosen as one of the boat's crew to land the
+captain.
+
+"Let Peter come," said Hartog when the boat was alongside. "I would
+have him engrave a plate to be set in some safe place, so that it may
+be known that I, Dirk Hartog, landed here, to any who may come after
+me."
+
+When we had come to the shore Hartog, taking the boat's crew with him,
+set off inland, leaving me to my work. The plate was soon finished,
+when I fastened it to a rock out of reach of the waves.
+
+It bore the following inscription:
+
+ "1616
+
+ "On the 25th of October arrived here the ship 'Endraght,' of
+ Amsterdam; first supercargo Gilles Miebas Van Luck; Captain Dirk
+ Hartog, of Amsterdam. She set sail again on the 27th of the same
+ month. Bantum was second supercargo; Janstins first pilot.
+
+ "Peter Ecoores Van Bu, in the year 1616."
+
+I engraved the date upon which the ship was to sail according to
+directions given me by the captain, though whether the "Endraght" did
+sail at that time I cannot say, by reason of an adventure which befell
+me.
+
+When I had finished my work I began to think in what manner I might
+employ myself until my companions returned, and, perceiving a grove of
+trees not far distant from where I stood, I determined to rest a while
+in the shade. As I penetrated these silent forests I beheld sights
+wholly novel. Parrots and paroquets flew among the trees, as also large
+white birds with sulphur crests, the like of which I had never seen
+before. Presently I came to a stream which took its course through a
+valley, and, kneeling, I was about to quench my thirst when I felt a
+hand upon my shoulder. Springing to my feet, I was confronted by a band
+of savages, many of whom held their spears its though about to strike.
+They were all quite naked, their bodies marked with white streaks. I
+tried to make them understand I came as a friend, and endeavoured to
+retrace my steps to the open, where I hoped my shipmates might see me
+and effect a rescue, but I now perceived that whichever way I turned my
+path was barred by these wild men. The savages now began to jabber to
+each other in a jargon which I could not comprehend, and presently two
+of them laid hold of me, one by each arm, and in spite of my protests
+and such resistance as I made, forced me through the scrub inland. Some
+of the tribe followed, others went on ahead, flitting like shadows
+among the trees, the journey being performed at a rate which made it
+hard for me to keep pace with them.
+
+All day we continued to penetrate the bush toward the interior of the
+country, and just before dark we came to a native village, where we
+found the tribe assembled at their camp fires. There must have been
+several hundred blacks in this camp, and many gathered round to look at
+me, although they did not appear to regard me with as much curiosity as
+might have been expected, from which I conjectured that white men were
+not unknown to them.
+
+After a meal of fish and wild duck, together with a pasty kind of bread
+made from the bulrush root, which I found palatable, I was permitted to
+lie down in one of their gunyahs upon a bed of freshly-picked leaves,
+where, in spite of my anxieties, I soon fell asleep.
+
+Toward morning I awoke to a full conviction of my sorry plight. The
+camp was in darkness, save for the glow of the fires and the light of
+the stars, which shine with a wonderful brilliancy in these southern
+skies. The cry of some night bird came from the bush beyond the camp.
+All else was still, but a crouching form at the entrance to the gunyah
+warned me I was a prisoner. There was no need, however, to set a guard
+upon me, for without a guide I knew I could never reach the coast, so
+that even if I succeeded in making my escape from the savages, I must
+perish miserably in the bush.
+
+My thoughts now turned to home and friends whom it seemed unlikely I
+would ever meet again. Dirk Hartog and the crew of the "Endraght",
+though rough as became the hardy lives they led, had always shown a
+kindly disposition toward me. They would miss me, and speak of me
+perhaps, until, in the changing events of their adventurous career, I
+would be forgotten. My parents also would mourn me as dead. But there
+was one at Urk who would miss me more than friends or parents; Anna
+Holstein, to whom I had plighted my troth, and to whom I looked to be
+wed on my return. Anna was above me in station as the world goes. Her
+father was the Governor of Urk, who would not willingly give his
+daughter in marriage to a poor lad such its I. But who in love is wise?
+Who reckons worldly wealth when love, the spirit and spring of the
+universe, awakens in the soul? Like birds who call their mates with
+love-learned songs, Anna and I loved each other, so that nothing bid,
+death could part us. I had promised Anna I would return rich from my
+voyage as others had done, when her father might be the more inclined
+to look with favour upon my suit. Well--here was the and of my
+promises, and my hopes--death, or, still worse, life among a savage and
+barbarous people.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER II
+
+THE BLACK CANNIBALS OF NEW HOLLAND
+
+
+On the morning after my capture by the black cannibals of New Holland,
+at daybreak, I was driven, out of the gunyah in which I had passed the
+night, to be looked at by the tribe, who had now collected in great
+numbers, and who encircled me with a ring of hazel eyes. Their
+complexion was black, their hair woolly, and many of them were quite
+naked, as though they lived in a state of brute nature. There did not
+appear to be anyone in recognized authority among them, for they all
+talked their outlandish jargon at the same time, and, presently, they
+began to search me for such small articles of personal property as I
+possessed. My engraving tools and a sailor's sewing kit, given me by
+Anna, were taken from me, but to my great good fortune they did not rob
+me of my dagger-knife, or my flint and steel which lay concealed in the
+inner pocket of my leathern belt, nor of a lock of Anna's hair which I
+carried in a silken bag round my neck; and in the possession of which I
+found much comfort in my present predicament. My clothes did not
+interest my captors, and I was thankful not to be deprived of them.
+
+I was now startled to observe that some of the natives carried at their
+girdles a human skull, but I subsequently learned that these trophies
+were not, as I had at first supposed, the result of a massacre, but
+were the drinking-cups of these people, who appeared to be the most
+debased in the scale of humanity I had ever encountered.
+
+During the morning, although I could see that a watch was kept upon me,
+I was allowed my liberty, and, in spite of my wretched plight, I became
+interested in observing the natives at their daily occupations, one of
+which consisted in the capture of wild-fowl from a lagoon close to the
+camp by the ingenious method of floating upon their quarry submerged up
+to their necks in water, their heads covered by a mass of weeds and
+bulrushes. When among the birds they suddenly drew some of them under
+the surface without appearing to disturb the others.
+
+And now a loud noise made by the beating of spears and waddies
+attracted my attention, when I came to the conclusion some tribal
+ceremony was in progress, and shortly afterward a number of youths were
+led in procession through the camp. These young men presented a strong
+and muscular appearance. Their naked bodies bore evidence of ill-usage;
+purple weals and open sores upon their backs and shoulders appeared to
+have been inflicted by the severe and long-continued stroke of the
+lash.
+
+After a dirge-like song had been sung, a number of the elder warriors
+stepped forward, and with a piece of quartz formed a deep incision in
+the nape or the neck of each youth, cutting broad gashes from shoulder
+to hip, all the while repeating rapidly the following curious
+incantation:
+
+ "Kangar-marra--marra,
+ Kano-marra-marra,
+ Pilbirri-marra-marra."
+
+A bunch of green leaves was then fastened round each middle and above
+this a girdle of human hair. They then blackened with charcoal, and
+their wounds plastered with clay in order to form the hands of gristle
+which they regard as an ornament upon their flesh. During this
+performance the lads showed no sign of pain, although their sufferings
+must have been very severe. Further ceremonies then took place, in
+which the women played a part too degrading to be here set down.
+
+That night a feast was held, with dancing, in honour of the morning's
+ceremonies. The night was warm and the moon shone with a wonderful
+brilliancy, casting deep shadows upon the earth. In the distance rose a
+pillar of sparks and fire, which marked the place where the performers
+were preparing for the corroboree, a name given to their dancing by
+these savages, and presently 200 men and 60 boys in nudity came from
+among the forest trees. Each dancer was provided with a bunch of leaves
+fastened above the knee, which, as they stamped in unison, made a loud
+switching noise. These natives were painted from shoulder to hip, with
+five or six stripes rising from the breast, their faces streaked with
+white perpendicular lines, making it appear as the dancing of dead
+men's bones. For some time the dancers continued to stamp to and fro,
+and then, assembling at a fire that burned close by, they
+simultaneously sat down. Other dancers then took their places, dressed
+in fur cloaks, and wearing white and yellow feathers in their hair,
+their black visages rendered hideous by fish-bones stuck through the
+cartilage of the nose above their thick lips. These singular beings
+stamped their way backward and forward, giving vent to yells of
+excitement, and causing their bodies to tremble and twitch in the most
+surprising manner. The last act of this strange drama represented the
+warriors sitting cross-legged round the fire, when suddenly they
+simultaneously stretched out their right arms as if pointing to some
+distant object, at the same time displaying their teeth and rolling
+their eyes, and then, springing to their feet, they uttered a shout
+that echoed for miles over the surrounding country.
+
+And now the preparations for a feast began. A number of women and young
+girls brought baskets of fish, roasted birds, and prepared bulrush
+root, whilst some very large eggs, such as I had never seen the like
+before, with green shells were stacked upon the grass. Strange-looking
+animals also, together with snakes and lizards, were stewed in clay
+vessels, while the savages gathered round in gloating anticipation of
+this repulsive food. When all was prepared one of the women gave a
+peculiar cry, when there came from among the trees the young men who
+had that morning undergone the baptism of initiation, each carrying
+upon his shoulder a bundle wrapped in reeds and bulrushes. Arrived in
+front of one who now acted as chief, much laid down his burden,
+exposing the contents--the body of a native child!--half roasted and
+drawn--the "long pig" of the cannibals!
+
+Overcome by what I had seen, I sought my gunyah, where I passed the
+night a prey to the most dismal forebodings. Next morning I became ill,
+with violent pains and headache, which incapacitated me for some days,
+during which time a lubra named Moira sat beside me, apparently anxious
+to do what lay in her power to ease my sufferings.
+
+Helped by the words I had learnt in my former intercourse with savages
+at the islands we had visited in the early part of the voyage, I was
+soon able to make myself understood to Moira, and to understand what
+she said when I confided to her my desire to escape to the sea coast At
+first she would only shake her head, but I became so insistent that at
+length she consented to help me. A tribal ceremony was very shortly to
+be celebrated, so Moira informed me, when the night would be favourable
+for the success of our project, since the tribe would then be assembled
+at the camp fires. On that night, moreover, there was no moon until
+late, and we trusted to be able to slip away in the darkness
+unobserved.
+
+I had always been impatient of my captivity, but now that escape was in
+sight I could scarcely control my desire to be rid of these savages. I
+counted the days, dreading lest some change in the manner of my
+captivity might prevent the carrying out of the plan we had formed; but
+all went well until the time came when Moira whispered to me our chance
+had come.
+
+The tribe were assembled at the camp fire, engaged in one of their many
+rites to propitiate the evil spirits whom alone they worship. Beyond
+the glow, darkness complete and compelling hung like a pall. The stars
+were hid by a curtain of clouds.
+
+"Come," I whispered to Moira, and reckless of consequences, we fled
+into the pitch black of the scrub.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER III
+
+THE ONLY WHITE MAN IN NEW HOLLAND
+
+
+After leaving the blacks' camp I made my way through the forest, guided
+by Moira, who could see in the dark. I was fearful lest we might be
+pursued, in which case I resolved I would not be taken alive. Moira,
+however, did not believe that we would be followed. Her people, she
+told me, were afraid to enter the forest at night, when evil spirits
+were supposed to be abroad, and indeed her own terror was so great that
+I realized her devotion to me in having braved, for my sake, the
+superstition in which she had been reared.
+
+Moira was right in thinking we would not be followed, for no attempt
+was made to follow us. But now a fresh anxiety arose. There were shapes
+among the trees which were visible to Moira, though I could not see
+them, which caused her such terror that I was obliged almost to carry
+her, and I sometimes thought by the chill of her body that she had died
+in my arms. With the dawn, however, the shapes disappeared, and Moira's
+fears were dispelled.
+
+Daylight found us several miles on our way to the coast, which we made,
+as I reckoned, about noon, to the north of where I had first landed.
+The cliffs here were high and rocky, the waves breaking at the foot in
+fountains of spray. The sky was dull and overcast, which betokened a
+storm. A number of white birds with yellow crests, such as I had seen
+on my first landing, flew inland, and several fur-coated animals, with
+heads resembling deer, and powerful tails, hopped across the stubble to
+the shelter of the trees. The prospect was a dreary one, and a feeling
+of melancholy oppressed me, which I found it hard to dispel.
+
+Moira did her best to cheer me, but I could not rid myself of the dread
+of being the only white man upon this desolate shore. When we had
+walked for some distance we came to a sandy beach, where we found a
+cave in which to shelter from the storm which now burst upon us.
+For an hour or more the elements raged with a fury only to be equalled
+in the tropics. Lightning flashed and thunder rolled, whilst rain fell
+with the force of a deluge. Then, suddenly, the storm passed, and the
+sun shone with renewed splendour, decking the dripping foliage with
+myriads of raindrop gems.
+
+We had depended for food since leaving the blacks' camp upon a supply
+of dried fish and prepared bulrush root, which Moira had brought with
+her in her dilly-bag, but we were now compelled to seek fresh means for
+our support. Moira collected a quantity of shellfish, for the cooking
+of which I made a fire of some dried wood. Moira showed the greatest
+astonishment and some alarm at my flint and steel, which I now used for
+the first time in her presence. Nothing would persuade her to touch it.
+She regarded it as something beyond her comprehension, as a fetish to
+be worshipped. When we had finished our meal we fell asleep, worn out
+by the fatigues of the long journey.
+
+And now began for me a life of dull monotony, with days devoted to
+watching the ocean, and sleepless nights of anxiety and despair. I had
+built a beacon upon the highest part of the cliff above our cave, to be
+fired in case of sighting a ship, and every morning, with the dawn, I
+mounted to this look-out to scan the horizon. Here I remained all day,
+and when darkness drove me to the shelter of the cave I tried to
+persuade myself that each night in this lonesome place would be my
+last.
+
+Had it not been for Moira I must have perished from want and neglect,
+for I could not bring myself to do anything for my personal comfort
+lest it might seem I had abandoned hope of rescue. But Moira was never
+idle. She worked for both, and displayed such ingenuity in converting
+to our use what Nature provided that we lacked nothing for our support.
+To begin with, she made an oven of baked clay, in which to cook our
+food. Next she plaited fishing lines from grass-tree fibre, and
+fashioned hooks from the bones of slaughtered birds and animals, to
+catch the fish which abounded near the rocks. With the aid of my
+Sailor's knife she made a bow and arrows to shoot the hopping animals,
+the flesh of which when roasted resembled venison, while their
+fur-coated skins made us warm sleeping mats. She even succeeded, after
+much labour, in constructing a canoe, in which to paddle along the
+coast, and sometimes, when it was calm, for some distance out to sea;
+nor did she appear to regret the loneliness of our lives. But I could
+not bring myself to take part in her work. Hour after hour, in moody
+silence, I paced the cliff beside the beacon, scanning the ocean, and
+speculating upon my chances of rescue.
+
+If I had not been so absorbed in my selfish thoughts I might possibly
+have prevented a catastrophe which afterward caused me much
+self-reproach. Moira had more than once told me that food had
+mysteriously disappeared from a cave in which she kept a store of
+meat for our use, and she showed me where the rocks in front of this
+cave had been scraped of seaweed and mussel-shells as though by the
+passage of some cumbersome body. But I gave no heed to her anxieties,
+and although she urged me to shift our camp I would not leave the
+beacon lest a ship might pass during my absence.
+
+Of the dreadful consequences which followed my selfishness it now only
+remains for me to tell.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV
+
+THE SEA SPIDER
+
+
+I was occupied one midday, as usual, scanning the horizon from the top
+of the cliff near the beacon in search of a passing vessel, when I
+noticed Moira urging her canoe toward the shore at a rapid pace. In the
+wake of the canoe a disturbance of the water betokened the presence of
+some denizen of the deep, and Moira's action in making for the rocks at
+top speed betrayed her terror of whatever it was that followed her.
+Hastily descending the cliff I ran to her assistance, when I saw Moira
+spring on to a flat rock upon which she generally landed from her
+canoe. At the same moment a snaky tentacle rose out of the sea and
+caught her, while other tentacles quickly enveloped her. The monster
+now dragged its shiny bulk upon the rock, and except in a nightmare
+surely no man had beheld such a creature before. It resembled a
+monstrous spider, but out of all proportion to anything in Nature. Its
+eyes, like white saucers with jet black centres, stared from its flat
+head, and the tentacles with which it seized its prey were provided
+with suckers to hold what they fastened upon.
+
+Even in her extremity Moira thought more of my safety than her own. "Go
+back!" she cried. "You cannot help me. The sea devil has the strength
+of ten men."
+
+Not heeding her warning I continued to advance to her assistance but as
+I approached the sea-spider drew back into its native element, and
+presently sank with its prey beneath the waves.
+
+In my first feeling of dismay for what had happened, I could not
+believe that Moira had been taken from me, and as I remembered my
+ingratitude to her and thought of how surly I had become, absorbed in
+my own trouble, I threw myself down upon the rocks in an agony of
+remorse. Alas, poor Moira! Faithful friend! True heart, and loyal to
+death! A thousand times I reproached myself with my neglect of her,
+but my regrets were unavailing, and my repentance came too late.
+
+It now became necessary if I would live to provide myself with food,
+and in this enforced occupation I obtained some relief from the
+dejection which had formerly obsessed me. I found no difficulty in
+procuring fish, and I quickly became expert with Moira's bow and
+arrows. Salt, also, I gathered from the rocks, and some roots which
+Moira had shown me served as vegetables. Of water I had an abundance
+from a fresh-water lagoon near by. So that I lacked nothing for my
+support. But although my body was nourished, my mind became so
+oppressed by solitude that, at times, I even thought of returning to
+the blacks and conforming to their ways, and had it not been that I
+knew them to be cannibals I might have spent the remainder of my life
+among them, so intense had become my longing to meet with others of my
+kind.
+
+Another cause for anxiety now made me consider whether I had not better
+move my habitation to some cave along the coast. Within a week from the
+carrying off of Moira by the sea-spider, I began to miss supplies of
+fish and flesh which I kept in the storehouse cave. Strange sounds,
+also, as of some heavy body dragging itself over the rocks kept me
+awake at night, and filled me with alarm. Could it be that the monster
+was once more paying its visits to the cave? The sounds continued
+during the night, but with the break of dawn they ceased.
+
+One morning, however, when I had resolved upon moving my camp, on
+mounting the cliff I sighted a vessel which I recognized as the
+"Endraght", coming up the coast from the south. In a frenzy of
+excitement I lighted the beacon and taking a silk handkerchief from my
+neck I waved it to attract attention. A dread overpowered me that my
+signals might not be observed, and had the ship passed without seeing
+me I verily believe I would have cast myself from the cliff on which I
+stood to certain death upon the rocks below. But now I saw that the
+vessel was heading for the shore, and presently a boat put off for the
+beach. Carried away by the thought of my salvation, I waded knee deep
+to meet my comrades, and climbing into the boat I soon found myself on
+board the "Endraght".
+
+So wild-looking and unkempt had I become that at first my shipmates did
+not know me, but when they recognized me I was given a hearty welcome.
+
+"Of a truth, Peter," said Hartog, smiling at my sorry appearance, "I
+have small wonder the cannibals did not make a meal off one so skinny."
+And, indeed, the hard life I had led on the island had reduced me to a
+bag of bones. But when I had washed and trimmed my hair and after I had
+clothed myself from my own sea-chest Hartog declared me fit to become,
+once more, his secretary.
+
+I sat late that night with my comrades, to whom I recounted my
+adventures, and when I reflected upon the dangers I had passed I could
+scarcely contain my joy at my rescue from a fate worse than death.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V
+
+THE VOYAGE CONTINUED
+
+
+Dirk Hartog, convinced that he had discovered the continent known as
+Terra Australis, determined now to seek the gold and gems which this
+fabled land was said to contain. The "Endraght" was accordingly brought
+to anchor near to the mouth of a river on the coast, and preparations
+were made to explore the stream in one of the ship's boats for some
+distance along its banks. In the course of the afternoon we attempted a
+landing, but as the boat neared the shore a number of natives ran down
+to the water's edge with spears in their hands, and with loud cries
+forbade our progress. A present of some nails and beads thrown among
+them seemed, for the moment, to produce a good effect, but on our
+attempt to land being renewed the natives again showed signs of
+opposition. Hartog endeavoured to make them understand that no injury
+was intended, but his friendly advances met with no success. A musket
+was then fired amongst them, which was replied to by a flight of
+spears, but no damage was done on either side. One of the natives then
+threw a stone at our boat, which was answered by a discharge of small
+shot, which struck him in the legs, causing him to jump like one of the
+hopping animals I had seen on the island. When we pointed our muskets
+again he and his companions made off into the bush. We then landed,
+thinking the contest at an end, but we had scarcely quitted the boat
+when the blacks returned, carrying shields for their defence. They
+approached us and threw spears, but with no result. Another musket shot
+convinced them their shields were no protection against our firearms,
+when they again disappeared.
+
+We then walked up to the blacks' camp and examined with much curiosity
+the primitive nature of their dwellings. Then, leaving some beads and
+pieces of cloth in exchange for some spears, which we took away with
+us, we returned to our boat, observing on our way several light canoes,
+each made of a single piece of bark, bent and laced up at both ends.
+In the evening two boats' crews were sent away fishing, and they caught
+in two hauls of the seine nearly three hundredweight of fish. Hartog,
+after our first landing, made many friendly overtures to the natives,
+who would not, however, hold any communication with us, from which we
+came to the conclusion that other navigators had been here before us,
+not so well disposed.
+
+With regard to the gold and precious stones we expected to find, our
+inspection of the blacks' camp convinced us that nothing of the kind
+existed, at all events, in this part of the country. Such ornaments or
+utensils as the natives seemed to possess were of the crudest
+description, made of wood or clay, or consisting of shells and pebbles
+from the seashore. The stories of fabulous wealth, therefore, to be
+found in this new land appeared to be myths. It was to seek for
+treasure that the "Endraght" had been equipped by a number of merchants
+at Amsterdam, of whom my master, De Decker, made one, and we realized
+how disappointed they would be if we returned empty-handed. Our crew,
+also, began to show signs of discontent, and to murmur at having been
+brought so far on a fool's errand. It was only Dirk Hartog's
+indomitable personality that prevented a mutiny.
+
+It was this same sordid greed for gain which had caused Christopher
+Columbus to be sent home in chains from America because he had failed
+to find gold. The acquisition of new countries did not interest those
+who equipped the navigators of this time. For this reason, no attempt
+was made by Hartog to take possession of any of the countries we
+visited. It was to find treasure he had been sent out, and should he
+return without it he might look for a surly welcome.
+
+Yet Hartog himself, I am convinced, with the spirit of a great
+navigator, found satisfaction in having accomplished so long a voyage,
+to reach the goal for which he sailed.
+
+"Can I help it, Peter," he said to me one evening when we sat together
+in his cabin examining the charts I had drawn under his directions,
+"that the natives of this country are poor? Gold, ivory, precious
+stones, spices even, seem not to exist in the South as they do in the
+East. Did I make this country, that I should be held responsible for
+what it contains?"
+
+But, although he spoke thus, I could see he was bitterly disappointed
+at finding the land we had come so far to seek little better than a
+wilderness, and the people upon it so poor that they went entirely
+naked, and devoured each other in order to satisfy their hunger. I
+tried to cheer him by reminding him we might yet find chances to enrich
+ourselves before returning home, but I could see he was troubled by the
+thought that the voyage he had accomplished with so much skill and
+daring might prove resultless in the accumulation of wealth.
+In order to hearten the crew with fresh adventure, the course of the
+"Endraght" was now directed toward the islands of the Pacific. These
+islands were reported to abound in pearl shell, and whilst cruising
+among them we looked forward to obtaining a supply of pearls which
+might compensate the merchants at Amsterdam for the expense of our
+voyage, and send us all home rich men.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI
+
+THE FIGHT ON THE SANDS
+
+
+I must now tell of all incident I would willingly have left unrecorded,
+but as I have undertaken to set down here, in the order of its
+sequence, each event which took place upon my voyages with Dirk Hartog
+on southern seas, I must not, as a faithful chronicler, omit to record
+each happening in its order.
+
+Now it so fell out that our first supercargo, Gilles Miebas Van Luck,
+bore me a grudge, although I could recall no act on my part upon which
+to attribute it, unless it be that I had gained the favour of the
+captain, of which I could see Van Luck was jealous. From the first Van
+Luck made no secret of his dislike of me, and more than once he
+complained to Hartog that by reason of my youth; I being at the time of
+sailing but nineteen years old, it would be more seemly if I took my
+meals with the men in the forecastle instead of in the cabin. But
+Hartog had overruled his objections. As his secretary he maintained I
+was entitled to berth with the officers, and after my rescue from the
+inhospitable shores of Terra Australis I continued to occupy my former
+place at the captain's table, although I would as lief have messed with
+the men sooner than have been the cause of a quarrel.
+
+At length matters came to a climax, when Van Luck ordered me to set
+about some menial work which I did not consider compatible with my
+position as the captain's secretary, and which, therefore, I declined
+to perform. In his rage at my refusal Van Luck came at me with a
+belaying pin in his hand, but I had fought many a battle with the
+fisher lads upon the sands at Urk, and was well able to take my own
+part, so that when Van Luck was almost upon me I nimbly stepped aside,
+and with a trick I had been taught by an old smuggler at Urk, I tripped
+him as he passed so that he fell into the scuppers, when, with a
+muttered oath, he scrambled to his feet, and, plucking a pistol from
+his belt, he would have shot me had not Hartog at this moment appeared
+on deck, and commanded him to throw down his arms.
+
+"How now," said Hartog, "am I captain of this ship or not? What means
+this mutiny? Come both of you to my cabin that I may hear the case and
+see justice done."
+
+Without so much as a look at either of us Hartog then descended to his
+state room, whither we followed him in shamefaced silence, for when the
+captain spoke we knew he must be obeyed.
+
+When Hartog had heard what we had to say, and the argument advanced by
+each on his own behalf, he delivered judgment in the following terms:
+
+"You are both of you in the wrong," said he. "Peter should not have
+refused to obey an order without referring the matter to me, and you
+Van Luck ought not to have taken the law into your own hands when I,
+your captain, am the proper judge upon such matters. Still I am willing
+to overlook your dereliction of duty (though by every rule of the sea
+you are both deserving of death at the yard arm) provided that at the
+first suitable place, and time, you fight out your quarrel as man to
+man, and pass me your words that, whatever the result, the survivor, or
+victor, shall bear the other no ill will."
+
+This was a favourite method of Hartog's for settling disputes that were
+occasionally bound to arise among his crew upon so long a voyage. Order
+upon the ship, he maintained, must, for the common safety, be rigidly
+observed, but if bad blood arose between men of high spirit and hot
+temper, the malcontents were landed at some convenient place where, in
+the presence of the ship's company to see fair play, they fought the
+matter out, afterwards returning on board with their ardour cooled, and
+their anger properly chastened. This plan, on the whole, was found to
+work well. Sometimes one and sometimes both of the combatants were
+killed, but, as a rule, the matter was settled without the sacrifice of
+life, and the parties returned from their blood-letting the better
+friends.
+
+After hearing Hartog's decision we both bowed and retired, and, in the
+terms of our promise, resumed the ordinary routine of our duties as
+though nothing out of the common had occurred. But the news of the
+coming fight spread among the crew and became the subject of gossip
+throughout the ship.
+
+I was now near twenty-one and Van Luck was three years my senior, we
+being all young men on board the "Endraght"; but I had led a hardy
+life, and my spell ashore had taken off superfluous flesh, and left me
+active and alert, with muscles like steel, an advantage not given to my
+older antagonist, who had, perforce, lived a monotonous existence for
+months past on shipboard. So I looked forward to the coming trial of
+strength and endurance with some degree of confidence, notwithstanding
+that Van Luck and his supporters promised me I would lose both my ears
+as forfeit, if not my life, in the encounter.
+
+The discussion over the right at length became so keen that Hartog,
+fearing it might lead to further disputes, determined to get it over as
+soon as possible, and for this purpose he altered the ship's course to
+an island he sighted on the horizon which we made during the same
+afternoon, when we came to anchor in a natural harbour formed by a
+coral reef and opposite to a hard sandy beach well suited to the matter
+in hand.
+
+At daybreak the following morning we landed two boats' crews on the
+beach, only the watch being left on board, who would nevertheless be
+able to see the fight from over the ship's bulwarks. It was a fine
+summer's morning, with little wind and no sea. The waves broke in crisp
+diamond sparkles upon the sand, and the feathery palms and coconut
+trees, with which the island abounded, imparted to the place a
+fairy-like aspect such as the hand of man could never design. The
+island appeared to be uninhabited and it seemed likely we would have
+the arena to ourselves, although our men were armed in order to repel
+attack.
+
+When Hartog had taken up a position upon a spot he had selected
+as suitable for the contest, he explained the conditions under which the
+dispute was to be settled. The fight won to be to the death, or until
+either party confessed himself vanquished or was unable to continue,
+and in no case was malice to be shown after the event, whatever might
+be the result. Having then proclaimed strict silence he ordered us to
+make ready and begin. Both my opponent and I were now stripped to the
+waist, our singlets being used as bandages for the right arm to protect
+it from a chance wound from the dagger knives with which we were armed,
+we being allowed no other weapon. My adversary was stouter than I, but
+we were both of a height, and what I lacked in strength I made up for
+in agility.
+
+And know we began to circle each other, waiting an opportunity to
+strike, which presently came to my opponent, who aimed a blow at me
+which I caught when his blade was within an inch of my heart. Putting
+forth my strength I strove to force his hand so that with his own blade
+he might kill or wound himself, but after a desperate struggle he broke
+away. Not a word was spoken by the onlookers, and no sound was heard
+save only the tread of our feet as we circled and waited for a chance
+to strike again.
+
+It now occurred to me that since my adversary had proved himself the
+stronger when I had tried to force his hand, my better plan would be to
+tire him if possible before taking the offensive again, and to this end
+I led him on, always nimbly avoiding the strokes he aimed at me instead
+of spending my strength by attempting to oppose them, and this method
+proved so successful that I presently had the satisfaction of observing
+in my opponent evident signs of exhaustion. Realizing his impotence,
+and now beside himself with anger, Van Luck suddenly rushed upon me,
+when, using a trick I had learnt, I tripped him so that he fell,
+dropping his knife, which, before he could recover it, I secured. By
+all the rules of the game he was now at my mercy, and I called upon him
+to surrender, but, with a scowl, he refused to give in. The advantage
+I had gained now entitled me to stab him to death where he stood, or to
+cut off his ears if I had the mind to do it, but I could not bring
+myself to kill, or maim, an unarmed man. I therefore threw down both
+knives at Hartog's feet, and returned once more to the fight with bare
+hands. My superior agility now began to tell in my favour, and I found
+I was the better boxer and wrestler of the two, so that I rained blows
+upon my opponent, some of which drew blood. He then tried to clinch
+with me, but I had waited for this, and when he seized me in his
+powerful grip I held myself as I had been taught to do by my friend the
+smuggler, so that when he tried to throw me, he himself, by his own
+weight and a dexterous twist I gave him, was hurled over my head some
+distance along the sand, where he fell upon the broad of his back the
+breath being knocked clean out of his body. For some time he lay to all
+appearance dead, and it being evident he would not be able to continue
+the fight, Hartog awarded me the victory, and, later, when Van Luck
+regained consciousness, he ordered him to shake hands with me, which he
+did with an ill grace, though of a surety I bore him no malice.
+
+"Peter," said Hartog to me when we were alone together in his cabin
+after the fight, "henceforth I look upon you as my comrade as well as
+my secretary; but do not, on that account, believe I shall be less
+strict to enforce discipline upon you equally with all under my
+command. At the great distance we are from home it behoves some one to
+be in authority, if we are ever to see the Netherlands again. Promise
+me then to set a curb upon your temper, and when Van Luck is able to
+resume his duties after the drubbing you have given him, let there be
+no bad blood between you."
+
+I gave my promise willingly, and I can honestly say that, on, my part,
+I bore no grudge against Van Luck, nor against any man of the ship's
+company, though I could see that Van Luck would never forgive me for
+having bested him, nor could I disguise from myself the fact that there
+were some among the crew who sided with him.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII
+
+THE SPIRIT OF DISCORD
+
+
+The days which followed my fight with Van Luck were full of anxiety for
+those who were responsible for the safety of the ship. It was evident
+that a spirit of discord had begun to show itself among the crew, which
+threatened a mutiny. Janstins, the pilot, whom we knew to be
+trustworthy, did not attempt to hide the peril that was brewing in the
+forecastle.
+
+"Those lubbers for'ard," he said when Hartog, he, and I sat together
+one evening in the cabin, "will make trouble if they can. They are a
+pig-headed lot, and a dozen apiece at the gratings would do them no
+harm. But while they outnumber us, as they do, three to one, we must
+avoid a quarrel. Besides, if we got the upper hand, and drove the scum
+into the sea, we'd be undermanned for the voyage, and unable to weather
+the first storm that came upon us."
+
+"What is it they want?" asked Hartog impatiently. "Am I a wizard to
+conjure gold and jewels out of the wilderness? They knew the chances
+they took when they set sail, and will have their wages paid in full,
+whereas I shall receive nothing but abuse, so that in this they are in
+better case than I, their captain."
+
+"Granted you are right," answered Janstins, "yet these dunderheads will
+not view the matter with such common sense. They believe that gold and
+jewels are to be found, but we have not the wit to find them."
+
+"Who has told them this?" demanded Hartog with a frown. "They must have
+a leader amongst them whom we wot not of. If I find him I'll send him
+adrift upon the sea to look for the treasure he speaks of with none to
+hinder him."
+
+It was the first time I had seen Hartog so deeply angered, aroused as
+he was by the rumoured treachery that was being hatched against his
+command, and when he spoke of the punishment most dreaded by seamen, of
+being cast adrift in an open boat with three days' provisions, I knew
+full well he would not hesitate to inflict this penalty upon whomsoever
+might be found attempting to undermine his authority.
+
+At these consultations held by the officers in the cabin, I noticed Van
+Luck was never present. He made an excuse for his absence that, as
+first officer, his place was on deck when the captain was below.
+Although this could not be disputed, yet I bethought me he might have
+found an opportunity to add his voice to our councils had he the
+inclination to do it. But as yet I had no proof of treachery against
+Van Luck, and although I suspected him, I was loath to voice my
+suspicions lest my action might be attributed to malice for his scurvy
+treatment of me.
+
+As luck would have it, an incident now occurred which, for the time,
+diverted the men's minds from the dangerous brooding in which they had
+indulged. A dark line appeared on the horizon, which at first we took
+for a breeze, but which, as it swept down upon us, proved to be a
+prodigious number of flying fish. These delicate creatures rose out of
+the water like silver clouds, and as they passed over our Vessel
+numbers fell upon our decks. These fish are excellent eating, and of
+those that fell aboard of us we soon had an ample supply. Hartog, as
+much to give the crew some novel occupation as from any other motive,
+set the men to work salting and drying the fish, so that we secured
+three barrels full, as an addition to our ordinary fare, which was very
+acceptable. The flying fish were pursued by a shoal of dolphins, which
+continued to play round our ship for several days, and some of these we
+captured with the line and converted into food.
+
+In the excitement of the sport the sailors soon forgot their mutinous
+conduct, and resumed something of their former cheerfulness. Like
+children, seamen are easily led and readily influenced.
+
+"I thank Providence," declared Hartog, "for the draught of fishes sent
+to us at so opportune a time; but for their coming I doubt we would
+have been at each other's throats ere this."
+
+And indeed there is more in chance and circumstance than most believe.
+
+I observed that Van Luck took no part in the fishing. The sport in
+which the seamen were engaged appeared to afford him more irritation
+than amusement.
+
+I often wondered that Hartog did not note the surly demeanour of his
+chief officer. But he did not appear to do so, and it was no part of my
+duty to make mischief between the captain and his first mate.
+
+When the fishing and salting were over, a breeze sprang up which
+freshened to half a gale--before which we scudded under furled mizzen
+and foresails. The men had now plenty to do, and there was no time for
+brooding or lamenting over lost hopes. It is mostly during a calm, when
+the ship rides motionless upon a painted sea, that mutinous and
+rebellious thoughts arise among seamen. When the vessel is ploughing
+her way through storm and stress, each man seems a part of the ship and
+to have an interest in her voyage. It is then, too, that the word of
+command carries weight and meaning, and the knowledge of common
+dependence upon the captain makes for obedience and discipline, so that
+while the gale lasted we had no fear of mutiny.
+
+At the end of a week, during which time we covered many leagues of sea,
+the weather moderated, when we found ourselves once more among the
+islands of the South Seas, and the thoughts of being again on shore,
+and the adventures that might be in store for us, put to flight less
+wholesome and healthy thoughts.
+
+By the time we came in sight of the islands Janstins had recovered his
+spirits, and Hartog his good humour. Janstins, who was of a sanguine
+disposition, began to speculate upon our chances of finding treasure,
+and Hartog predicted that fortune stood upon the shores of one of these
+pleasant islands to welcome us, and send us home rich men.
+
+"It is not in nature, Peter," he said to me, "that precious stones and
+metals exist only in the Old World. They are as much the elements of
+the earth as rocks and water. It only needs a patient search to
+discover a mine of wealth, as yet untouched by civilized man."
+
+I did not like to discourage him, but, young as I was, I knew how
+fickle a jade is fortune, giving to one with both hands, and from
+another withholding that which he most deserves.
+
+Besides, who could tell, among these countless islands or the Pacific,
+upon, which one Nature had lavished her wealth?
+
+As we approached the land I noticed that Van Luck appeared to have lost
+the influence he had acquired over the crew, many of whom seemed now as
+anxious to avoid him as before they had been inclined to follow him. He
+was, therefore, left much to his own devices, which, from his surly
+manner, did not seem to be pleasant company.
+
+"I am resolved, Peter," said Hartog to me, "not to return home without
+sufficient treasure, at all events, to pay for the expenses of this
+voyage. So make up your mind to grow old among savages unless luck
+brings us a ransom from this banishment. My reputation, nay more, my
+honour, is pledged not to go back empty-handed, and I'd face greater
+perils than any we have encountered sooner than tell those
+money-grubbers at Amsterdam their principal would not be returned to
+them with interest."
+
+I could understand the captain's dilemma, but I sighed when I thought
+of the time that might elapse before I would again see my betrothed.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII
+
+PEARL ISLAND
+
+
+For some weeks after sighting the South Sea Islands we continued to
+cruise among them, visiting many places, some of which were unknown to
+former navigators.
+
+The weather at this time was calm and fine, but one day when in the
+open sea a tempest drove us among a number of islands, most of which
+appeared to be little better than barren rocks. As we approached,
+however, we observed one of large size, mountainous, well wooded, and
+fertile, and here we hoped to find the fresh water and vegetable food
+of which we stood in need. On rounding a coral reef which made a
+natural breakwater, we anchored in a quiet bay opposite a beach, and a
+party of us made ready to go ashore.
+
+The waters of this bay were blue as the sky above, and we could see in
+the depths below a marine garden of seaweed and coral, and what
+interested us more, a great quantity of pearl shell. As we rowed
+towards the shore the beach became thronged with natives who appeared
+by their gestures to be full of wonder at the sight of our vessel. The
+people here were of a light coffee colour, with wavy hair. The men, of
+large stature, well formed, and dressed with a degree of taste far in
+advance of any of the savages we had hitherto met with. Elaborate
+devices were tattooed upon the exposed parts of their bodies; a
+petticoat of finely-plaited cloth reached from waist to knee; beautiful
+necklets made from red and white coral hung round their necks; while
+their hair was frizzled like a mop upon their heads, powdered red or
+yellow. The women were similarly attired, save that their petticoats
+were longer and their hair hung straight, while the children went
+entirely naked except for garlands of bright flowers. No weapons were
+carried by these islanders, and upon landing we found them friendly,
+and inclined to offer us hospitality.
+
+The houses in the town to which they welcomed us are of a beehive
+shape; the sides open during the day, but closed at nights by blinds
+made from the leaves of the coconut tree. The floor is formed of
+powdered white coral, and is very clean. The town was built in a
+semi-circle facing the beach. In the centre was the king's house, a
+building of the same construction as the others, but of larger size.
+Beautifully-made mats and wooden bowls formed the only furniture in
+these dwellings, some of the mats being trimmed with red feathers,
+while others resembled shaggy white wool rugs, which, on closer
+inspection, proved to be made from the bark of a dwarf hibiscus, with
+which the islands abound, bearing a bright red flower. The food of the
+islanders consists of fish, coconuts, taro, yams, and breadfruit, of
+which there is a plentiful supply.
+
+In return for their hospitality, Hartog distributed among the natives
+pieces of bright-coloured cloth, beads, knives, and other trifles,
+which, in the eyes of these simple savages, were so many wonders
+hitherto undreamed of.
+
+When we had been some days upon the island Hartog expressed to the king
+his desire to obtain the pearl shells of which we could see an
+abundance at the bottom of the bay, within easy reach of an expert
+diver, and as these islanders were as much at home in the water as upon
+land, we soon had a pile of shell upon the beach which some of the crew
+set to work to open; but although we opened a great number of shells
+very few pearls were found, and none of any special value.
+
+When the king observed what we were in search of he offered Hartog for
+his acceptance a number of pearls, some of large size and perfect
+colour, which from time to time he had collected.
+
+"'Twill be enough to satisfy the merchants," said Hartog to me when he
+had safely locked up this treasure on board the "Endraght", "but
+nothing over, unless we can add to the collection by our own
+exertions." But although we continued to open shells for several days
+no great haul of pearls was made. The pearl shell we shipped, knowing
+that it would fetch a good price at Amsterdam.
+
+Hartog was so relieved at having secured something that would repay the
+expenses of the voyage that he recovered his natural buoyancy of
+spirits which had lately been oppressed by the prospect of returning
+home empty-handed.
+
+"'Tis wonderful, the power of money, Peter," he said to me one evening
+when we were counting, in secret, the pearls which the king of the
+island had given him; "we have come through some perils, as you know,
+but I give you my word I was never so afraid of anything as of going
+back without money's worth to satisfy the men who put their capital
+into this voyage. It was that which broke the great heart of Columbus,
+and I'd have become a pirate sooner than return empty-handed. The pious
+rogues who sent us out, and who never miss their churchgoing, would not
+have cared whence the money came so long as it filled their pouches."
+
+Hartog had not confided the secret of the king's present to any but me,
+as he feared the crew, disappointed in the treasure hunt which they had
+been promised, might try to take forcible possession of it. He was so
+absorbed in counting the pearls and in speculating upon their value
+that he gave no heed to the possibility of being spied upon. But since
+I was to have no share in them, the pearls did not interest me as much
+as they did the captain, and I allowed my eyes to wander, when, in a
+flash of summer lightning, I saw the face of Van Luck looking down upon
+us from the skylight above our heads.
+
+Making an excuse to go on deck, I stole cautiously up the
+companion-stairs, expecting to catch Van Luck red-handed in the act of
+playing the spy upon us, but when I reached the skylight I could see no
+sign of him. From where I stood, however, I was able to observe the
+captain counting the pearls, and I determined to warn him to have a cover
+made for the skylight, or a blind inside that might be drawn to ensure
+privacy. But I did not think it would be wise to say anything about my
+suspicion. It would be hard to prove, and might be set down to malice,
+though honestly I bore Van Luck no ill will.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX
+
+MUTINY
+
+
+A month after leaving Pearl Island, when it became known to the crew of
+the "Endraght" that a course had been set for home without having
+obtained the treasure which had been the object of the voyage, the
+spirit of discontent in the forecastle which had previously shown
+itself, became so marked as to threaten a mutiny. Had it not been that
+we held all the arms and ammunition aft, there would have been little
+doubt of the seamen refusing duty. As it was, they went about their
+work in so surly a manner, that if Hartog had not kept a check upon his
+temper, a serious outbreak on more than one occasion would have
+occurred.
+
+"I cannot think what evil influence is at work among the men," said
+Hartog to me one evening, when we sat together alone in the cabin, for
+Van Luck, except at meals, seldom joined us. "As sailors, they ought to
+know that treasure hunts often prove disappointing, and they will each
+receive a good round sum in back pay when the crew is disbanded after
+the voyage. What, then, would they gain by mutiny? Without a navigator
+they would either lose the ship, or, if they succeeded in making a
+port, they would become food for the gallows. Knowing sailors as I do,
+I cannot understand, in present circumstances, what it is that fosters
+rebellion, unless some influence is at work that we wot not of."
+
+It was then that I thought it my duty to tell the captain of my
+suspicions regarding Van Luck, and of how I had seen him looking down
+upon us through the skylight at the counting of the pearls.
+
+Hartog was amazed at such treachery on the part of his first officer.
+His own nature was so open that he found it hard to credit deception in
+others. My disclosures, however, enlightened him on much that was
+taking place, and he bade me keep him advised of anything further I
+might see or hear. To this end, I made frequent excuses for spending my
+time in the forecastle among the men, pretending I found the
+companionship in the cabin irksome. I had not been long among them
+before I discovered a plot that was hatching to take the ship. Hartog
+and I, together with those who would not join in the mutiny, were to be
+set adrift with three days' provisions in one of the boats, when Van
+Luck would navigate the "Endraght" to the nearest port, promising to
+divide the pearls, the value of which he had greatly exaggerated,
+equally among all hands, share and share alike.
+
+To be forewarned is to be forearmed, and I had no sooner divulged the
+plan of the mutineers to the captain than Hartog began to consider how
+we might meet the situation. Janstins, the pilot, the ship's carpenter,
+and three of the crew we knew we could depend upon, and they were
+instructed where to find arms and ammunition, and told to rally to us
+aft at the first signs of mutiny. Having completed these arrangements,
+Hartog's next step was to bring matters to a climax, for he argued
+rightly there was nothing to be gained, and much might be lost, by
+delay.
+
+Stepping boldly upon his quarterdeck, he now issued his orders in his
+old peremptory style, and, upon one of the crew not moving smartly, he
+threatened him with a dozen at the ship's gratings. The man turned
+insolently, and demanded to know to whom Hartog was speaking, while, at
+the same moment Van Luck, who was standing near, remonstrated with the
+captain on the man's behalf. I had never seen Hartog really roused
+before. In two quick strides he was beside Van Luck, and picking him up
+as easily as if he had been a child, he flung him from the poop on to
+the deck below. At the same moment the mutineers made a rush aft, but
+those who were loyal to us were before them, and we presented such a
+formidable front that the rebels fell back, taking Van Luck with them.
+Hartog now turned the brass cannon, which had already been loaded upon
+the mutineers where they crowded together in the fore part of the
+vessel, swearing he would fire upon them if they did not instantly
+surrender. A hurried consultation followed, after which Van Luck
+stepped forward as spokesman. He complained that the crew had not been
+fairly dealt by. They had suffered much hardship, he said, and it was
+understood that all treasure obtained on the voyage was to be shared
+among them, whereas it appeared that the captain was concealing a
+parcel of pearls of sufficient value to make them all rich men. To this
+Hartog replied as follows:
+
+"I am captain of this vessel, and I claim the right to do as I please.
+The pearls you speak of none of you helped to obtain, and they will be
+used to pay the expenses of the voyage, including what may be found to
+be due to each man as wages when the when the ship is paid off. As for
+you, Van Luck, who have acted the spy and played traitor, you may
+expect nothing from me but the fate you intended for those who have
+stood by me. The others may now return to duty."
+
+It was then seen that Van Luck had no followers, for rebels are ever
+prone to abandon their leader when their cause is lost.
+
+I would have pleaded with Hartog, even then, to spare Van Luck from
+being cast adrift upon the sea, but I knew no word of mine would change
+his purpose. Besides, an example must be made, and in the rough life we
+led the administration of justice was the prerogative of the captain
+alone. A boat was therefore prepared, three days' provisions were
+placed on board of her, and Van Luck was sent upon what promised to be
+his last voyage.
+
+For as long as the boat remained in sight we could see that the
+castaway made no effort, either with the sail or the oars, to shape a
+course in any direction. He appeared to have abandoned hope, and to
+have made up his mind to let the wind and the waves carry him
+whithersoever they would. At length the boat appeared but a speck upon
+the ocean, and finally it vanished beyond the horizon.
+
+For some time after the quelling of the mutiny Hartog maintained strict
+discipline among officers and crew, issuing his orders in the
+peremptory manner of one accustomed to command, and seldom speaking to
+any except upon matters connected with the ship. But when order was
+restored his mood changed, and we resumed our friendly chats together
+in the cabin. He never referred to Van Luck, whom he seemed to have
+wiped from the slate of his recollection, nor did he again allude to
+the mutiny. Once, when I touched upon it, he had cut me short, and I
+could see from his manner that all reference to it must henceforth be
+taboo. But I could not help sometimes recalling the picture of the boat
+with the solitary man on board of her, drifting upon the grey waste of
+sea, and I often wondered if Dirk Hartog had been able to obliterate
+that picture from his mind.
+
+We now once more sailed in familiar waters, and passed many vessels as
+we neared home, where we arrived, without mishap, towards the end of
+the year 1620, after an absence of nearly five years, which was not
+regarded at that time as a voyage of unusual duration.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER X
+
+I EMBARK ON A SECOND VOYAGE
+
+
+On my arrival at Amsterdam I obtained leave from my master, De Decker,
+to visit my parents, and was received by them at my home at Urk with a
+great show of affection, which, however, I found to be somewhat
+lessened when it was known I had come back with empty pockets. My
+father urged me to give up the sea, and to stick more closely to the
+business of a merchant at Amsterdam, for which my education had fitted
+me, and my mother extorted from me a half-willing promise that I would
+follow my father's advice. I also met Anna Holstein, to whom I related
+my adventures; nor did I conceal from her that my worldly condition was
+not yet sufficiently improved to warrant my making formal proposals for
+her hand in marriage.
+
+My mother pronounced my appearance much improved, when she heard of my
+attachment to Anna she declared me to be a fit mate for any lady in the
+land.
+
+"Of a truth, Peter," she said, "thou art become a proper man, like thy
+father was before thee, and in my day a young man of spirit chose his
+wife where he would. My own parents made objections to my being married
+to your father without some payment to them in goods or money, to
+compensate for the expense of my upbringing. But Abel Van Bu, thy
+father, came to our house one June morning and bade me make ready to
+marry him that very day, a clerk in holy orders being come to Urk to
+mate together those islanders who were willing to be wed according to
+the rites of the Church, and Abel's manner was so masterful that
+neither I nor my parents dared say him nay. This is how I came to marry
+your father, my son, and were I a man such as thou, art, I would take
+the girl of my choosing, in the same manner as thy father did."
+
+But although I laughingly agreed with my mother, I knew that such a way
+of proceeding would not answer with Anna Holstein. Anna was rich. It
+would have shamed me to go to her, a penniless husband. Still, love is
+blind, and that Anna and I loved each other was not to be denied; so,
+one evening, by the Zuider Zee, we once more plighted our troth.
+
+It was then that Anna confided to me a trouble of which she had kept
+the knowledge secret, fearing it might vex me, to the neglect of my
+work at Amsterdam. I had become so absorbed in my love for her, that I
+had given no thought to the question of others paying their court. Yet
+that such should be the case was but natural. Anna was young,
+beautiful, and wealthy, the only child of a proud noble, so that when
+Count Hendrick Luitken proposed for her, Anna's father regarded his
+suit with approval, and recommended him to his daughter's good graces.
+But Anna, whose heart was wholly mine, had evaded the Count's
+attentions, although she dared not openly reject him, lest the
+clandestine love we bore each other might become known by reason of too
+close questioning, so she had been compelled to play the part of a
+wilful maid who did not know her own mind, and could not be made to see
+how advantageous the alliance proposed for her would be.
+
+"I could never marry anyone but you, Peter," she whispered to me, as we
+sat together on the terrace of the palace by the Zuider Zee, after she
+had confided to me her anxieties, "but I find it hard to keep up the
+deception that I am heart-whole and fancy-free, and yet indifferent to
+Count Hendrick's attentions. Indeed, my father openly upbraids me with
+being fickle, inconstant, unmaidenly, and I know not what besides,
+until I am driven to my wit's end to keep the peace between us. Yet I
+doubt not, if he knew the truth, he would marry me willy-nilly to Count
+Hendrick Luitken by force."
+
+"Then it would be to a corpse he would marry you," I cried, "for sooner
+than see you wedded to Count Luitken I would strangle him with my bare
+hands if he refused to meet me as an equal in fair fight."
+
+"Dear Peter," whispered Anna, as she nestled closer to me, "if I cannot
+marry you I'll marry none other, and the Church does not now sanction
+marriage vows given unwillingly. If they drive me to it I can at least
+seek the cloister or the grave."
+
+"Do not speak so, dear Anna," I entreated. "We are both young, and by
+patience and industry I may yet win a place in the world."
+
+But although I spoke hopefully I could see but little prospect of my
+advancement at Amsterdam. My master, De Decker, the merchant, in whose
+house I was employed, told me plainly that I need expect nothing more
+than a clerkship so long as I remained in his service. His son, then a
+boy at school, would inherit his business, and it might be many years
+before I could hope to buy a partnership in it. De Decker's business at
+this time, moreover, was not in a very flourishing condition. It
+seemed, therefore, not improbable that I would lose my clerkship unless
+it improved.
+
+In these circumstances I was approached by Dirk Hartog some twelve
+months after the return of the "Endraght", who offered to take me as
+first officer on the "Arms of Amsterdam", a new vessel upon which he
+was about to make a second voyage of discovery to the South.
+
+"It is not because we met no luck with the 'Endraght' that there is
+nothing to be gained, Peter," he said. "There is an island I have heard
+of which, if we can strike it, will make us rich men. Nothing venture,
+nothing win, and there is little prospect here for a man like you to
+make money by quill-driving."
+
+His words impressed me, as well they might, for the love of adventure
+was strong within me, and I reflected that in my present calling of a
+merchant's clerk I could not hope to obtain an independence for many
+years--perhaps not at all. De Decker, also, appeared anxious that I
+should go. The sale of the pearls which the king of Pearl Island had
+given Hartog had more than repaid the merchants for sending out the
+"Endraght", and with the "Arms of Amsterdam" they hoped to accumulate
+further treasure. I was influenced also by Hartog's description of the
+Island of Gems, and the more I thought of the offer he had made me the
+more I liked it. Finally, I agreed to sign on for this second voyage,
+and, taking leave of Anna and my parents, I embarked upon the "Arms of
+Amsterdam", and set sail once more for southern seas.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XI
+
+A SECOND VOYAGE WITH HARTOG TO THE SOUTH
+
+
+For three months after leaving the North Sea we sailed south, meeting
+with no land until we sighted a group of islands which Hartog believed
+to be the group that the Spaniard Cortes attempted to explore in 1519,
+when one of his ships was burned by the hostile natives, while he and
+his crew escaped with difficulty in the other vessel. These islands are
+mountainous, well wooded, and apparently fertile. In most places that
+we saw the trees were very thick, with spreading branches, in which we
+perceived houses to be built, which looked like the nests of some large
+bird. We approached the land with caution, for we knew from experience
+that the tides in the vicinity of the South Sea Islands are very
+irregular, and seem to be much affected by the prevailing winds and
+currents. There is only one tide in the twenty-four hours. The
+flood-tide sets to the north, and the ebb to the south. It therefore
+behoved us to choose a safe anchorage, which, after consultation, we
+finally decided upon, selecting a spot sheltered from the prevailing
+wind, in deep water, close to a beach and opposite to a stream.
+
+Two boats were then lowered and manned, Hartog taking charge of one and
+I of the other. The natives, who had assembled in great numbers on the
+beach, did not appear so surprised at the sight of our vessel as might
+have been expected. As the boats drew near, some of them waded out to
+meet us, showing no fear, but rather an anxiety to welcome us. They
+were all entirely naked except for a strip of tapa cloth, which formed
+a tee-band around the middle and hung down behind like a tail. This was
+probably the reason for the reports given by the earlier navigators of
+the existence of tailed men in these regions.
+
+Some of the natives wore feathers in their hair, and all had fish bones
+thrust through the cartilage of the nose, which gave them a ferocious
+aspect. Even young boys wore sticks in the same fashion. The women were
+attired in petticoats of white tapa cloth, which hung down in strips
+from a girdle round their waists.
+
+Before trusting ourselves among these savages we gave them, as peace
+offerings, coloured beads and bright pieces of cloth. Our presents were
+well received, but immediately on becoming possessed of them the
+natives laid them at the feet of a young man who stood apart from the
+crowd, surrounded by several tall and fierce-looking savages. From this
+we concluded the young man to be the king of the country, though we
+wondered he should be so young, as the leadership amongst savages
+generally goes to the strongest.
+
+We then showed the natives our water-casks, and, pointing to a stream
+close by, made them understand we desired to fill them, to which they
+offered no objection, so that we at once began to water the ship. When
+we had finished our task we were invited by signs to go to the king,
+and, being well armed against treachery, we boldly marched up in a body
+to the king's house, which we found to be an immense building, nearly
+300 feet long and 30 feet wide. It had a high peaked portico, supported
+by posts 80 feet high, from which a thatched roof narrowed and tapered
+away to the end, where it reached the level of the ground. The house
+resembled nothing so much as an enormous telescope, and here the king
+lived with his numerous wives and families, together with all his
+relatives and immediate retainers.
+
+From the knowledge I had picked up on my travels, particularly during
+the time I was captive among the black cannibals of New Holland, I had
+acquired the art of understanding, either by words or signs, what
+savage people wished, by their language, to convey, which to most would
+have been unintelligible, and from what I could gather it appeared that
+the young king, who had but lately inherited his kingdom from his
+father, whose tomb, perched on the top of a tree, was pointed out to
+us, was threatened with war by a neighbouring chief, the former king's
+hereditary enemy, and that if we would help him vanquish his opponent
+he was willing to hand over to us the property of other white men which
+had been left upon the island in years gone by.
+
+When I had imparted this proposition, so far as I was able to
+understand it, to Hartog, he expressed a wish to see the white men's
+treasure, and on my repeating this request to the king's councillors,
+we were invited to accompany them to a part of the island where we were
+shown what were undoubtedly the remains of Cortes' vessel, the one that
+was burnt and abandoned to the savages. There did not at first sight
+appear to be anything of value among the ancient relics, but I noticed
+some iron boxes, which had rusted at the locks, so that it became
+difficult to open them. With the aid of a crowbar, however, which I
+sent for from the ship, we were able to prise the lid off one of them,
+when it was found to be filled with Spanish money, much gold coin being
+amongst it. There were twelve iron boxes, and we reckoned that each box
+contained money to the value of two thousand English pounds. At the
+sight of this treasure Hartog readily consented to assist the king of
+the islands against his enemies by every means in his power, and an
+agreement was come to accordingly. Hartog then ordered the specie to be
+taken on board, when we attended a council of the chiefs to ascertain
+the part it was proposed for us to play in the war, I acting as
+interpreter.
+
+It then appeared that a number of canoes were expected shortly to
+arrive from the adjacent islands. They would be met by the young king's
+fleet, when a naval battle would take place; but the issue was
+doubtful, since the hostile chief possessed many more canoes than the
+young king did. It was to neutralize this disadvantage that our
+services were required.
+
+Now the "Arms of Amsterdam" was a more powerful vessel than the
+"Endraght", mounting four guns, so we had little doubt but that we
+would be able to render valuable assistance to the young king in the
+defence of his country, and having pledged ourselves to support him we
+returned to our ship, well pleased with our adventure.
+
+Next day the beating of war drums and much commotion ashore announced
+the approach of the enemy fleet, and having loaded our cannon we stood
+out to meet them. Twenty war canoes belonging to the king, each
+containing 100 men armed with spears and clubs, put off to take part in
+the battle. They were far outnumbered, however, by the hostile fleet,
+which now approached. At the sight of our ship the oncoming war canoes
+appeared to hesitate, and for some minutes ceased rowing, but presently
+they advanced again in the form of a crescent, evidently intending by
+their superior line of battle to surround us. We were now midway
+between the opposing fleets, and when the enemy canoes were well within
+range Hartog delivered a broadside, which had the most remarkable
+effect ever witnessed in a naval engagement. Not wishing to kill the
+natives if it could be avoided, since the quarrel was not ours, Hartog
+directed that the first broadside should be fired over the heads of the
+advancing savages, but the result was the same as if we had sunk or
+crippled the hostile fleet. At the flash and sound of the cannon, with
+black smoke rolling across the water towards them, the savages turned
+and fled, driving their canoes back to the place whence they had come
+at a pace which sent the foam flying from the paddles. But the most
+unexpected part of our interference was that the savages on board the
+king's canoes appeared to be as terrified as were the enemy, for they
+also turned and fled towards the shore. So we had the satisfaction of
+seeing the opposing fleets flying from each other without blood being
+shed.
+
+Having thus brought matters to a satisfactory conclusion, and fulfilled
+our agreement with the young king to drive off the enemy fleet, we
+continued our voyage, well satisfied with our first transaction.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XII
+
+THE SEA SERPENT
+
+
+For some days after leaving Cortes' island the weather continued fine
+and the sea calm, but a strong breeze then springing up from the
+north-west made it necessary to shorten sail. While so engaged we
+sighted a number of whales, which swam to meet us. Never before had I
+seen so strange a spectacle. Their vast numbers, their great bulk, and
+their quick evolutions impressed me with wonder.
+
+The whales in these parts are fearless of man. They have not yet
+learned to regard him as an enemy. This fearlessness, however, although
+remarkable, was not to our liking, for some of the whales came so close
+to us that our decks were often deluged by the water which they spouted
+upon them.
+
+One day, some little time after this adventure, the weather having
+moderated to a calm, a number of ripples appeared upon the sea, which
+at first we took to be a breeze, but on drifting among them we found
+the phenomenon to be caused by a number of water snakes, varying in
+size from a few inches to many feet in length. Some of them appeared to
+be asleep, whilst others reared their heads at us, although they made
+no attempt to attack us. Suddenly they disappeared, as though scared
+by the approach of a common enemy.
+
+We had now been for some days becalmed, and at length we began to fear
+we had drifted into a dead sea, where the wind never rose, and the
+currents ran in a circle. The sun by day blistered the decks so that
+the tar bubbled in the seams. The nights were more tolerable, but the
+air below had become so foul that the cabins were deserted for the
+open. A musty smell rose out of the water, and made it hard to breathe
+the oppressive atmosphere. We lay about the deck exhausted, like a
+company of sick men.
+
+One night the watch came aft to where Hartog and I were trying to
+obtain some rest, with the report that a monstrous shape had been
+noticed passing under the vessel, and on looking to leeward we could
+see that the water was agitated by some large body. Hartog inclined to
+the belief that the disturbance was caused by a number of whales, the
+one following the other, but the men declared the shape they had seen
+was a monster of amazing proportions. Both Hartog and the men were
+equally resolved upon their respective theories; but while they were
+arguing the matter, and the dawn being now come, all doubts were set
+at rest by the appearance of a prodigy so incredible that I scarce
+dare set down, in this plain tale, a description of it. Within fifty
+yards from the vessel a serpent's head, not unlike those we had seen,
+but infinitely larger, rose above the surface of the water, and
+presently a great water-snake began to swim slowly round our ship in
+decreasing circles. Its length could not have been less than 200 feet,
+while its girth, in the middle, was almost that of a fair-sized whale,
+tapering towards the head and tail. Lashing the sea around it into
+foam, the serpent drew closer until it looked as though it would crush
+the ship in its folds. Hartog, the only man amongst us who preserved
+his presence of mind, ordered our guns to be loaded and fired at the
+monster. This was done, but our broadside had no more effect upon the
+leviathan than to cause it to swerve from its circling movement, when
+it made off with incredible speed towards the horizon, whence it
+returned apparently bent upon destroying us.
+
+We now gave ourselves up for lost, when suddenly out of the sea rose
+another huge bulk, resembling the sea-spider which had carried off poor
+Moira, but ten times larger, when a combat ensued between the
+leviathans which created waves around our vessel, and caused her to
+rock and plunge as in a storm. The battle raged for the best part of an
+hour, and sometimes when the monsters came near it seemed likely that
+the ship would be swamped by the volume of water which they lashed into
+the air. Suddenly the combat terminated by both monsters disappearing
+into the depths without our being able to ascertain which had proved
+the victor.
+
+So that some record of this remarkable combat might be preserved, I set
+down upon paper a description of it, intending to deposit it among the
+public archives on my return home. I had read that such leviathans
+existed, and had been seen by early Phoenician mariners, though I had
+always regarded their existence more in the light of fable titan fact.
+
+And now, a breeze springing up, we were once more enabled to continue
+our voyage. Some of the crew were anxious to return home in order to
+spend their share of the Spanish money found on Cortes' island, but
+Hartog would not consent to such a proposal. He had set his heart upon
+finding the Island of Gems, of the existence of which he was firmly
+convinced, though our chances of finding it among the numerous islands
+of the South Seas appeared remote. The captain, however, would have his
+way, and a course was set accordingly. We were soon again among the
+islands, where we found the people more intelligent than those upon the
+continent of New Holland. Their language, although consisting of many
+dialects, possessed some universal key words, of which, by this time, I
+had acquired a knowledge which enabled me to make myself understood of
+the various tribes of savages we met with, and to understand also their
+meaning when they wanted to convey it to us. To this I attributed the
+friendly reception which, on the whole, was given to us. Attacks upon
+strangers, made by these savages, are not so much from any natural
+hostility towards them as from an inability to understand that they
+intend no harm--consequently I was generally able to establish friendly
+intercourse between us and the tribes we visited. Besides this, our
+ship possessed such a powerful armament that, if molested, we had no
+fear but that we would be able to protect ourselves.
+
+We made many inquiries from the savages concerning the Island of Gems,
+but none seemed to have heard of it.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIII
+
+THE FLOATING ISLAND
+
+
+Soon after leaving the islands of the South Seas we encountered heavy
+weather, a tempest, the worst we had experienced, driving us before it
+to the south. The storm lasted for more than a week without abatement,
+and during this time we covered many leagues of sea. Owing to the sun
+being obscured, it was impossible to ascertain our whereabouts, but
+Hartog reckoned we had passed through the Straits set down on an early
+chart as named after Le Maire. But for skilful handling we would have
+lost our ship, so prolonged was the gale, and when, at length, the
+weather moderated, we found that much damage had been done to our
+rigging and deck-gear. This made it necessary for us to effect repairs,
+and while so engaged we continued to run before the wind to the south.
+As we proceeded, the cold became intense, while the wind gradually
+decreased. One morning, at sunrise, a snow-covered land rose before our
+astonished eyes. The sun shining upon it produced an effect which, for
+beauty, I had never seen, equalled. Immense ranges of mountains rose
+from a flat surface, their summits lost in fleecy clouds, while from
+one of the mountain tops, incredible as it may appear, belched smoke
+and fire as from the crater of an active volcano. It may well be
+believed with what astonishment we beheld a burning mountain in the
+midst of snow and ice. We coasted for some distance along the shore of
+this new continent, which formed an ice barrier rising in a long
+perpendicular line from the sea, making a landing impossible.
+
+When the repairs to our ship had been effected, we hauled our wind, and
+stood away northward, when we found ourselves surrounded by masses of
+floating ice. In no record of any voyage that Hartog or I knew of is
+any mention made of this phenomenon, so we concluded we were the first
+to see it. The farther we went the more numerous became the icebergs,
+and the more difficult the navigation owing to fogs and mists. The
+whole surface of the water as far as the eye could reach was covered by
+dense masses of ice, and had not the breeze freshened so that we were
+able to avoid the ice pack, we might never have made our way to the
+open sea. Some of the icebergs were beautifully formed, and the
+countless prisms of which they were composed glowed in the sun's rays
+with the delicate colour of the rainbow.
+
+Next day the wind had fallen to a calm, and we rode upon a sea of
+glass. We had left the pack ice, but before us stretched an island of
+such extent that the end of it could not be seen. This island rose to
+the height of twenty feet. It was perfectly flat, with steep,
+perpendicular sides, which made it inaccessible to man. From the
+masthead, however, it was possible to observe its surface, which we saw
+to be covered by a vast number of penguins, so we knew a landing must
+be available somewhere, for these birds are wingless. This island was
+composed entirely of ice, it being, as Hartog reckoned, a glacier which
+had broken off from the main continent into the sea. It was drifting
+north, and would gradually melt in the warmer atmosphere to which the
+current was taking it, but many years must elapse before this would
+happen.
+
+That evening we remained in the vicinity of the island. The twilight of
+this region in which we now found ourselves continued without fading
+into night, and to add to the beauty of the scene an aureola appeared
+in the sky. It was a sight, once seen, never to be forgotten. A world
+of perpetual day.
+
+With the return of sunlight Hartog determined, if possible, to effect a
+landing, and leaving the "Arms of Amsterdam" in charge of Janstins, the
+cutter was manned, in which the captain and I set out for the shore.
+After pulling for some distance; and when almost out of sight of our
+ship, we came to a kind of platform where the ice was broken, making it
+possible to climb to the top of the island. We had no sooner set foot
+there than we were surrounded by penguins. They came waddling towards
+us in the most comical fashion, nor were they in the least afraid of
+us. The presence of man for the first time in these latitudes appeared
+to inspire them more with curiosity than alarm.
+
+The attentions shown us by these remarkable birds, however, soon caused
+us considerable inconvenience. They crowded upon us in such numbers
+that it was difficult to force our way through them, either farther on
+to the island or back to the boat. Some of them stood four feet high,
+and although they made no attempt to molest us, the bulk of their
+bodies (the ones at the back pressing upon those in front) made it
+difficult to push by. It was like passing along a densely-crowded
+thoroughfare. So numerous became the penguins that Hartog ordered a
+return to the boat. We did not like to kill these birds, as they
+appeared harmless, and the trust they showed in us was surprising. When
+we came to the landing place we found it covered with small fur-coated
+seals, who also showed no fear of us, and made no attempt to escape
+when we approached them. The skins of these creatures we knew to be
+rare and of value, so we were impelled to slaughter some of them for
+their fur coats, and also to give us a supply of fresh meat; but their
+large brown eyes looked at us so sorrowfully when we attacked them that
+we had not the heart to kill more than was necessary for our immediate
+needs. It was too much like murder.
+
+The penguins followed us down to the landing-place, until it was full
+to overflowing. Some of the birds pushed the others into the water in
+their eagerness to witness the killing of the seals, which they
+appeared to be discussing with much interest.
+
+A breeze springing up, we returned to the ship, and toward evening,
+still steering northward, the floating island was lost to view.
+
+We were now in better spirits than heretofore. We had filled our water
+tanks from the ice floes, and supplied ourselves with sufficient fresh
+seal meat to last until we came to a warmer climate, to begin again our
+search for the Island of Gems. The men we had with us upon this voyage
+were a better class than were the crew of the "Endraght", and we had no
+fear of mutiny. There were grumblings occasionally at the length of
+the voyage, but these vanished at each fresh adventure. Sailors, as a
+rule, are easily led, and if there is no evil influence at work among
+them they seldom incline to mutiny when they know that the safety of
+all depends upon discipline and obedience to the captain's orders.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIV
+
+AN OLD ACQUAINTANCE
+
+
+Most of the islands we visited on our return to the South Seas we found
+to be inhabited. But some, although well-wooded, and possessing a
+luxuriant vegetation, were unoccupied except by sea-fowl. It was toward
+one of these islands we now directed our course in order to fill our
+water tanks, when we observed a solitary figure upon the beach whose
+hair and beard hung down in a tangled mass upon his chest and
+shoulders, while the skins of some small fur-coated animal, roughly
+sewn together, made him a covering for his body unlike any we had seen
+adopted by savage tribes. His attitude, moreover, as he stood upon the
+beach, shading his eyes and gazing intently at us as we rowed towards
+the shore, suggested the European rather than, the savage, and upon
+coming close up to him we knew him to be some castaway marooned upon
+the island. He appeared to have lost the power of speech, although he
+made guttural sounds when he saw us, and, what was more remarkable, he
+seemed to recognize us.
+
+It then came to me in a flash that this solitary man was none other
+than Van Luck, whom we had last seen drifting away from the "Endraght"
+upon his lonely voyage after the mutiny, and, in pity at the sight of
+his forlorn condition, I held out my hand to him in reconciliation. So
+great, however, was his hatred of me, which he had probably nursed,
+that, instead of taking my hand, he rushed upon me and tried to
+strangle me, in which he might have succeeded had not others of our
+party come to my assistance. He seemed demented, and he had acquired
+such strength during his exile that it was as much as four men could do
+to hold him down. But, notwithstanding his unprovoked attack upon me, I
+felt I could not abandon him again to his solitude. I therefore ordered
+him to be taken on board our vessel, where Hartog would be the judge of
+his ultimate fate.
+
+Hartog's surprise at seeing his old officer in such a deplorable
+condition was equal to my own, but the terrible change which years of
+solitude had wrought in Van Luck appealed to the humane side of the
+captain's nature so forcibly that he determined to give the castaway a
+chance of redemption.
+
+After some days, during which Van Luck was cared for, he began to
+regain some semblance to his former self. He also, by degrees,
+remembered his native tongue, but he spoke in a halting manner like a
+child. While we remained at this island we visited the cave in which
+Van Luck had lived during the time he had been marooned. It contained
+nothing belonging to the boat in which he had been set adrift, from
+which we inferred the boat had been lost at the time when he was washed
+ashore. He seemed to have subsisted chiefly upon turtles, of which
+there were numbers basking upon the beach, and also upon a small
+species of squirrel, of the skins of which, roughly sewn together, his
+robe was made, but we could find no sign of a fire, so we concluded he
+had devoured his food raw. There were streams and springs on the
+islands from which to quench his thirst, but his sufferings must have
+been very severe during his enforced solitude, nor was it a matter for
+wonder that his mind had become deranged.
+
+But although Hartog took pity upon Van Luck to the extent of taking him
+off the island, he would not admit him to his old place in the cabin at
+the officers' mess, so he lived with the seamen in the forecastle,
+where his jealousy wanted to send me on our first voyage. This,
+however, did not seem to trouble him. He seldom spoke, but went about
+such work as was given him without complaint. Sometimes he would stand
+for hours watching the sea, with his hand shading his eyes, in the same
+attitude as we had found him.
+
+I could see that Hartog was troubled by this man's appearance, as
+indeed was I also. It seemed a reproach to us to have been the means of
+bringing a fellow-creature into such a condition. Yet we had acted as
+necessity demanded and in no spirit of malice or revenge. Still, the
+consequences which had sprung from my fight with Van Luck and his
+subsequent part in the mutiny were not such as we cared to contemplate.
+If judges could see those whom they sentence after they have endured
+their punishment they would pause before passing fresh sentences upon
+wrongdoers, however guilty.
+
+I could see that Van Luck attributed to me all his misfortunes, for he
+watched me closely, but when I spoke to him he shifted his gaze
+uneasily, as though afraid to look me in the face. I can honestly say I
+felt nothing but pity for him, and I made allowance for his animosity
+toward me when I remembered his cruel punishment.
+
+"Of a truth, Peter," said Hartog to me one evening when we sat together
+in the cabin, "I had better have shot Van Luck than let him live to
+become what he is. Never again will I send a man adrift upon such a
+voyage, though by all the rules of the sea the mutinous dog deserved
+what he got for his treachery. It was not his fault that you and I were
+not marooned instead of him."
+
+I did not answer, but had I then known the malice in Van, Luck toward
+me, of which I shall hereafter tell, the compassion which I felt for
+him would have been lessened.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XV
+
+THE SEAWEED SEA
+
+
+Of all the adventures through which we had passed, perhaps there was
+none so dangerous as that which now befell us. We had shaped our course
+to the east, on the look-out for a new group of islands, among which
+Hartog expected to find the Island of Gems, when, one morning, we
+observed the horizon to have assumed a black look as though a storm was
+brewing, but on nearing this phenomenon, we found it to consist of an
+immense growth of seaweed floating upon the ocean, and extending as far
+as the eye could reach.
+
+The course we were steering would have carried us into the midst of the
+weed, so we hauled our wind, and coasted along it to the south, hoping
+either to find an opening through which we might pass, or to come to
+the end of the floating mass, but the farther we proceeded the thicker
+the weed became, while other masses now appeared to larboard, so that
+we feared we might be enmeshed in such a manner that we would find it
+impossible to extricate ourselves. I had read of a sea covered by a
+weed which held ships entangled as in a net, and I feared that this was
+the danger into which fate had now led us. Portions of the kelp
+detached from the main mass, which floated alongside the ship, proved
+it to be a growth of extraordinary strength, the weed extending twenty
+feet and more below the surface of the water, and being so tough that
+two of our men between them were unable to break a specimen we drew on
+board, so that if we should become entangled in the kelp, we knew that
+death by slow starvation, when our provisions were exhausted, would
+await us.
+
+During the day upon which we first sighted this phenomenon we attempted
+every manoeuvre of navigation to keep the ship clear of the weed, but
+in spite of all we could do, and the ceaseless watch Hartog and I
+between us kept on deck, the dawn of the next day found the ship as
+stationary as though we had run ashore.
+
+"Nothing but a gale from the right quarter can save us, Peter," said
+Hartog when we held a consultation together in the cabin, "and even a
+gale will not help us unless it comes soon and before the weed
+gathers."
+
+I knew what he said was plain truth, yet I advised we should keep a
+brave face before the men, as nothing would be gained by provoking a
+scare.
+
+Notwithstanding our assumed cheerfulness, however, we could see the
+crew were becoming alarmed, and as each day added to the accumulation
+of the weed which collected between us and the open sea, anxious looks
+were turned to the horizon in the hope of detecting the long-expected
+breeze.
+
+So as to give the men occupation, and prevent their brooding, Hartog
+gave directions to man the boats in order that an attempt might be made
+to tow the ship through the weed, but after two days' fruitless effort
+the attempt was abandoned. It was dreadful to contemplate our impotence
+in the face of this danger, which hourly grew upon us. The seaweed, in
+itself so harmless that it becomes the sport of children when washed
+ashore upon the beaches at home, here, in its original and monstrous
+growth became more terrifying than all the Leviathans of the deep.
+There was something irresistible in this brown mantle which drew its
+folds so silently and yet so surely around us that even Dirk Hartog's
+indomitable spirit quailed at the thought of what might be before us.
+"What demon led us hither, Peter?" he said to me when a week had
+passed, and we still rode motionless in the grip of the seaweed. "Of
+all the perils which mariners must face, whoever heard of a ship's
+company being brought to their doom by floating kelp?"
+
+I told him of the sea of which I had read, and which I believed we had
+come to. He listened to me with patience, and then relapsed into a
+reverie, from which I found it impossible to arouse him.
+
+On coming on deck I detected Van Luck at his old game of sowing discord
+among the men. They did not, however, appear to pay much attention to
+what he said. He had now no authority over them, and none but Janstins
+and Bantum, who were with us on this second voyage, remembered him as
+the first officer of the "Endraght". The ingratitude of the man,
+however, after the consideration we had shown him, angered me, and I
+spoke to him roughly, and ordered him to quit the deck.
+
+"Take heed," I warned him, "that I do not have you put in irons, or
+sent adrift upon a second voyage."
+
+Van Luck obeyed me with a scowl, and slunk below, but I could see an
+evil light in his eyes which I attributed to madness, though I was
+subsequently to learn there was much method in it. I did not like to
+add to Hartog's anxieties by telling him of Van Luck's conduct, and,
+indeed, when I considered our present predicament, it seemed unlikely
+that Van Luck, or anybody else, could do us much harm or good.
+
+And now another event occurred to add to our perplexities. The kelp
+around the vessel suddenly became alive with a small species of black
+crab. These creatures must have scented the food from our vessel, and
+they came in millions to besiege us in order to devour it. The deck was
+soon black with them, and they swarmed below in ever-increasing
+numbers. Nothing escaped them, and most of our provisions were quickly
+demolished. We killed them in thousands, and the stench from their
+crushed bodies almost drove us out of our minds, but other thousands
+quickly filled their places, and the crustaceans continued to pour down
+the hatches like black streams of evil-smelling water.
+
+But this visitation, dreadful though it was, eventually proved our
+salvation. The weed, now alive with marine life, lost its density, and
+when, at length, the breeze came, we could feel we were making headway.
+But had we not been able to force our passage into the open I verily
+believe we would all have been devoured alive by black crabs, which
+swarmed upon us. As it was, many of the men suffered severely from the
+bites of these creatures, and weeks elapsed before the ship was clear
+of them and the stench which they had brought aboard. But when the
+breeze freshened from the right quarter, and we felt our vessel moving
+toward the open sea, we were too thankful for our escape from a
+horrible death to think of the lesser evils from which we suffered,
+though the destruction of such a considerable quantity of our stores
+was a serious loss, and set Hartog thinking as to whether our immediate
+return to Amsterdam was not imperative.
+
+"I had made up my mind for another year in these latitudes, Peter," he
+said, "and I am loath to go back without setting foot upon the Island
+of Gems, but man is but a straw in the hands of Destiny, and who am I
+to set myself against the decrees of Fate?" So with mixed feelings of
+disappointment and pleasure we once more found ourselves homeward
+bound.
+
+I had hoped that from this voyage I might return a rich man, able to
+make honourable proposals to Count Holstein for his daughter's hand,
+but it seemed now that fortune was not to be won so easily. My share of
+the treasure found on Cortes' island might enrich me sufficiently to
+buy a small interest in my master's business, but this was all I could
+hope for, and the bright dreams which Hartog and I had formed of the
+Island of Gems seemed about to dissolve, as is the way with phantoms,
+into thin air.
+
+But who can trace the course of Destiny, or fathom the mysteries of
+Fate?
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVI
+
+THE ISLAND OF GEMS
+
+
+For some weeks after getting free from the kelp we experienced fine
+weather, with favourable winds and a smooth sea, when, almost without
+warning, a storm broke upon us with hurricane force. All hands were
+ordered to shorten sail, no easy task in the fury of a gale. As chief
+officer I took command in the fore part of the vessel, while Hartog
+issued his orders aft. The sea ran so high, often breaking over the
+bows and swamping the decks, that I ordered the men to attach
+themselves by lifelines to the foremast, and I also secured myself in
+the same way. As sometimes happens at sea in the heart of a storm, a
+succession of rollers followed each other, making it impossible to do
+more than hang on until they pass, and during one of these intervals I
+observed Van Luck, whose presence I had forgotten in the hurry of the
+moment, standing by the foremast with a knife in his hand. I was
+powerless to reach him from where I stood, and a moment later the
+lifeline which held me to the foremast was severed, when, despite a
+desperate effort which I made to retain my hold, I was swept into the
+sea.
+
+For a time, which seemed to me an eternity, I was under water, but when
+I rose to the surface I could see the ship at some distance from me,
+fighting her way through the storm. I was almost suffocated by the
+spray which continually blew over me, and the heavy sea boots which I
+wore, filling with water, threatened to drag me down. I had given
+myself up for lost, when I noticed a spar floating near, which must
+have been washed overboard with me, and, making an effort, I succeeded
+in laying hold of it, so that I managed to keep afloat. Thus holding to
+the spar and swimming, sometimes with one hand and sometimes with the
+other, I kept my head above water until my feet touched ground, when I
+waded upon the shore of an island, where I fell down exhausted, and for
+the time lost consciousness.
+
+When I came to myself it was almost dark. I had fortunately been
+carried by a current upon the leeside of the island, so that I was
+protected from the wind and sea, but my limbs felt numb and cold, while
+the blood coursed feebly in my veins. I felt too weary to move, and
+presently I fell asleep, from which I awoke, as I judged, about
+midnight, much refreshed.
+
+I was now once more haunted by the thought of being marooned in a
+strange country, so that I remained awake, bemoaning my fate and
+blaming myself for not having taken better precautions against such a
+mishap. These reflections led me so far that I began to form a project
+against my life, but the dawn dissipated my gloomy ideas, when I made
+up my mind to trust to Providence, which had protected me through so
+many perils.
+
+I then mounted the high land to scan the horizon, but no sign of the
+ship could I see, so I knew myself to be again a castaway. The island
+appeared to be one of considerable size, very fertile and well watered.
+The verdure inland was unusually luxuriant, even for the tropics. From
+the centre of the island rose a mountain, with a smoke-cloud banging
+upon it, which proved it to be an active volcano.
+
+The storm had passed, and the weather was pleasant, the beat not
+excessive, being tempered with a land breeze. I descended after a while
+into a valley, where I noticed a number of fresh-water ponds, at one of
+which I knelt down to drink, when I perceived a prodigious quantity of
+bivalve shells of one single species, which formed a kind of beach, in
+breadth about fifteen feet. The water in the pond was clear, and
+although it was deep, the sand and shells at the bottom of it were
+easily seen.
+
+Whilst I was admiring their beauties I was startled by the approach of
+a party of natives, the leader of whom, a tall, muscular savage,
+marched in front of the others, who followed him with some degree of
+order. From the crown of his head to his waist he was plastered with a
+red pigment, his frizzled-out hair being ornamented with the plumes of
+the bird of Paradise. His dress, composed of tapa cloth, shells, and
+feathers, was more elaborate than any I had seen in the islands. In his
+hand he carried a spear tipped with white quartz. His followers were
+decked in similar fashion. Raising his right arm in token of
+friendship, an overture to which I responded, the chief then addressed
+me in the same dialect to that used at Cortes' island, which I had
+little difficulty in understanding, although some of the words puzzled
+me.
+
+"Whence come you?" said he. "From the sun or the sea?"
+
+"From the sea, O chief, whither I will return when my friends, the
+white spirits, come for me," I answered.
+
+This reply did not seem to surprise my interrogator, who now desired me
+to follow him. After proceeding for some distance through a luxuriant
+forest we came to what appeared to be the gates of a town. Two large
+perpendicular stones rose to the height of fourteen feet above the
+ground. These pillars must have been twelve feet through at the base,
+and five feet on top, while a still larger stone, some sixteen feet
+long and four feet thick, was mortised into the perpendicular columns.
+It was difficult to understand how such huge stones could be quarried
+and transported inland by a people possessing so few mechanical
+appliances as these savages, but to my inquiry regarding this curious
+gateway I was answered that the stones had been there as long as any
+could remember, having been placed in position by supernatural agency.
+
+At the gate of the city crouched some miserable specimens of humanity:
+old men and women, haggard, shrivelled, and naked. These unfortunates,
+I afterwards learned, were the aged and infirm, too feeble to perform
+their share of the work of the tribe and condemned to remain at the
+gateway, dependent for food upon such charity as might be given them.
+On entering the town we passed a number of warriors, all fine, athletic
+men, dressed in the same style as those who accompanied us, and painted
+with stripes of red, yellow, and white pigment.
+
+I was now received by a commanding figure, whom I took to be the king.
+He was even more gorgeously dressed than the others, with strings of
+bright stones round his neck and Paradise plumes in his hair, while
+upon his head was a circlet composed of human teeth, set in clay, in
+the centre of which glowed an opal of extraordinary fire. His face was
+sullen and cruel, and his hazel eyes, with their dark lashes and
+yellow-tinged whites, gave to his countenance an expression scarcely
+human. Near to him stood a group of young men, their bodies plastered
+with a bright red pigment, who appeared to be his personal attendants,
+or slaves.
+
+This savage now addressed me, asking the same questions as the other
+chief, to which I returned similar answers. I was then led to a house
+with a beehive-shaped roof, where food was brought to me, consisting of
+coconuts and bananas, with a luscious kind of fruit I had never before
+tasted, but which I found very palatable. After my meal I was taken
+before the queen.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVII
+
+QUEEN MELANNIE
+
+
+The queen was white--indeed very pale--with large dark eyes, and brown
+hair that hung down in its natural beauty, untouched by the pigments
+with which the savages convert their own hair into mops. She was
+dressed in a robe of white tapa cloth with strings of bright shells and
+gold ornaments upon her neck and arms. Upon her head was a diadem of
+white clay encrusted with uncut gems. The throne upon which she sat
+was of polished marble. Her left hand rested upon the woolly head of a
+black boy, who showed his white teeth as we entered. In her right hand
+she carried a human skull. The queen, though very beautiful, looked
+sad. She could not have been more than eighteen years old, and it was
+evident she came from European descent, and was in no way related to
+the savages by whom she was surrounded.
+
+And now I bethought me if I would gain favour I must make a present to
+the queen, and remembering a small mirror I had with me, set in a
+silver frame, which Anna had given me as a parting gift, I took it from
+my pocket and presented it to Queen Melannie, the name by which her
+people addressed her. It cost me a pang to part with it, but I
+reflected that if these savages killed me, as seemed likely unless I
+could ingratiate myself with them, the mirror would, with equal
+certainty, pass into their hands as if I voluntarily surrendered it.
+
+The queen uttered an exclamation of surprise when she caught sight of
+her face in the looking glass, nor could some of her attendants who
+stood near resist the temptation to look over her shoulder in order to
+see the reflection of their own faces also. Nothing that I could have
+given the queen would have pleased her more. My present at once brought
+me into favour, for all appeared to regard such a prodigy as the work
+of immortals.
+
+Queen Melannie, having appropriated Anna's mirror, and finding I
+understood what she said to me, then dismissed her attendants and
+invited me to a private audience. I asked her how she, a white lady,
+came to be among savages, but she could tell me nothing except that she
+remembered standing upon the beach as a child, alone, when it was very
+cold, and that she cried very much, until the natives had brought her
+into this house, where she had been reared and cared for ever since.
+
+"They tell me I was born of the sea," she said, "but I do not believe
+that, for I seem to remember other faces, like yours, before I came
+here."
+
+It was then plain to me that this poor girl had been shipwrecked as a
+child, and cast upon this island. It was sad to think that one so
+beautiful should be condemned to live among savages, but I reflected
+that my own case was no better, for it seemed unlikely I would return
+to civilization. Melannie appeared to place full confidence in me from
+our first meeting.
+
+"I am not really queen," she said. "Ackbau is king, and I must do as he
+tells me. He makes me speak his words, but sometimes I would rather not
+say what he bids me."
+
+I sympathized with her, for I could readily understand why this Ackbau,
+who was the chief before whom I had been taken, chose her to be his
+mouthpiece. She had become a goddess to the tribe, and it was thought
+she could speak nothing wrong. So that by using her as his medium
+Ackbau gained his ends without accepting responsibility.
+
+Whilst I was talking to the queen I could not help admiring the jewels
+in her diadem, and seeing I was pleased with them she invited me to
+accompany her to a rock cavern near to her dwelling, where I saw such
+an accumulation of wealth that I began to picture myself among the
+richest of men. The floor of this cave was carpeted with gold dust, and
+nuggets of the same precious metal were piled high against its walls.
+But what caused me to rub my eyes in wonder was a slab of opal, which
+seemed ablaze with the fire it contained. Upon this priceless table
+were strewn a collection of gems, which, from the knowledge I had
+acquired in De Decker's office at Amsterdam, I knew to be of great
+value, but which did not appear to be so regarded by the queen, for
+when she had presented me with a double handful she still seemed to
+consider herself in my debt for the mirror and some other trifles I had
+given her. I now knew that I had come to the Island of Gems of which
+Hartog had spoken. But, alas! of what use was all this wealth, since I
+could not spend it in this place, and it seemed improbable I would ever
+go back to my own country?
+
+Melannie now returned to her dwelling, which I subsequently found she
+seldom left, except at night, which accounted for the fairness of her
+skin. All festivals were held at night, by moonlight, and what struck
+me as peculiar was the absence of fire. Fish and shellfish were eaten
+raw, but many subsisted entirely upon coconuts and fruit, which grew
+upon the island in great profusion.
+
+The native city in which I now found myself consisted of a number of
+dwellings of beehive shape, thatched with grass, and usually about
+twelve feet high. The queen's house was about three times as large as
+the others, and was placed in the centre of the town, with an avenue of
+trees, and a clear space before it for tribal dances or meetings.
+Ackbau also lived in a large house. On the reserve around the queen's
+palace, the older men spent most of the day in gossiping, or playing
+upon reed pipes, which furnished their sole musical instrument. The
+younger men made nets, mended weapons, or shaped stones for their
+slings. The natives in this island did not appear to understand the
+use of the bow and arrow, their only weapons being clubs, slings, and
+spears. The spears were made of hard wood, polished and inlaid with
+pearl shell and beaten gold. The slings were of plaited fibre, the
+stones being rounded like an egg. The clubs were of various shapes,
+some with rounded heads, and others bent and pointed like a pick.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XVIII
+
+A QUEEN'S FAVOURITE
+
+
+Three days after my coming to the Island of Gems I discovered, to my
+embarrassment, that Queen Melannie regarded me with more than royal
+favour. It had been her custom to seclude herself from her people
+except upon occasions, but now she preferred to walk with me daily upon
+the cliffs, or among the rich foliage, which made a natural garden in
+the valleys. None molested us, for those to whom the queen showed
+favour were taboo to the rest of the tribe, so that as long as I
+retained her goodwill I was safe. But who would be dependent upon a
+woman's whim?
+
+"You do not love me, Peter," she said, for I had told her my name, "not
+as I love you. Your blood is cold. It does not run warm as mine does
+when I hold you to me."
+
+I tried to pacify her, but she would not be satisfied.
+
+"You do not love me! You cannot love me!" she repeated. "They want me
+to give you to the snake god. Why should I keep you if you do not love
+me?"
+
+This was the first time she had threatened me, and I began to realize
+that the love she professed was tempered by a degree of venom which at
+any moment might consign me to some cruel death.
+
+Surely no man was placed in such a dilemma as that in which I now found
+myself. In all my adventures I had never felt so helpless as I did when
+dealing with this wilful queen. I dared not tell her of my love for
+Anna Holstein, for I knew that such a confession would quickly seal my
+doom. Yet I could not return her love, for Anna was never out of my
+thoughts. Meanwhile Ackbau watched us closely, content to bide his
+time.
+
+The people upon this island were unlike any I had previously met with.
+I conjectured that in ages past some tribe of Indians had migrated to
+it, for that Indian blood flowed in the veins of its present
+inhabitants seemed beyond doubt. Their intelligence exceeded that of
+aborigines, and their language contained words of Hindu origin. As for
+the queen, I set her down for a Portuguese maiden, whose mother must
+have accompanied the captain of some trading vessel, probably in search
+of the Island of Gems, when, by a stroke of fate, the ship, with all
+hands, had foundered, leaving Melannie the sole survivor.
+
+Ackbau seldom spoke to me, and when he did his tone was unfriendly.
+"The white man will make good sport at the coming of the snake god," he
+said to me once when I had angered him by walking out with the queen,
+and those with him had laughed, and had looked at me in a manner that
+made me speculate upon what cruel fate it was to which they, in their
+own minds, had already consigned me.
+
+Of the tortures practised by the islanders upon those who offended
+them, I was not left long in doubt. There had lately been a war, so
+Melannie told me, between this people and those of an adjacent island
+in which some captives had been taken who, according to custom, would
+be offered in sacrifice to propitiate one of the many evil spirits whom
+these benighted people worship. On the day of the sacrifice I was
+bidden to be present, and not daring to refuse, I accompanied the queen
+to a barren spot at the foot of the mountain where some gaunt trees
+rose out of a bed of lava. Here we found Ackbau haranguing the victims,
+and describing to them the tortures they would shortly be called upon
+to suffer. One of the captives had been prepared for the sacrifice,
+and, but for the gravity of his position, his appearance might have
+excited mirth. His body was encased in a kind of basket from which his
+head, arms, and legs protruded, giving him the appearance of a gigantic
+insect. To the top of the basket, or tamgky, to give it its native
+name, was attached a rope of flax, the end of which had been thrown
+over a branch of one of the trees to the height of about forty feet
+from the ground. By command of Ackbau, a file of warriors now began to
+pull upon this rope, when the victim was drawn up to the branch over
+his head, where Melannie told me he would be allowed to remain until,
+in the course of time, the rope rotted away, when the skeleton would
+fall to the ground. The object of enclosing the vital parts of the
+victim in a basket was that death might come as slowly as possible.
+Some would live, so the queen assured me, for many days, during which
+time of agony their faces and the exposed parts of their bodies would
+be devoured by ants and other venomous insects. Yet Melannie sat
+unmoved by the sight of these tortures, and even smiled when the poor
+wretch had been drawn up to his awful doom, and cried out in his agony.
+For that smile I felt that I could kill her.
+
+Unable to control myself in the presence of such barbarities, I
+abruptly left the place of execution and began to ascend the mountain,
+at the foot of which the sacrifices were made, which I could see was
+the cause of a commotion among the natives. As none offered to stay me,
+however, I continued my way up the steep sides, which I found to be
+composed of rocks and scoria, with occasional patches of coarse grass.
+Among the slag of metals between the crevices of the rocks I unearthed
+a number of gems, though none so large as those which Melannie had
+given me, which I added to the collection I carried in a belt I had
+made for the purpose. I knew it was unlikely these bits of coloured
+crystal would ever be of value to me, but I carried them in the hope
+that some day I might be rescued, when I would return home possessed of
+the wealth I had coveted, and which I had risked my life to obtain.
+
+As I explored the mountain I could hear the rumbling of the volcanic
+fire within, while as I proceeded a rain of fine dust descended, making
+further progress disagreeable. Earth tremors also warned me that the
+crust here was thin, and therefore dangerous. The mountain seemed on
+the verge of eruption, and I wondered that no alarm for the safety of
+the town built at the foot of it had been shown by Melannie and her
+people. But I remembered that volcanoes, like all great works of
+Nature, measure time by the lapse of ages, and that a thousand years
+will often pass between the convulsions of the internal fires which
+find an outlet through the earth's craters. The smoke and heat of the
+mountain, however, reminded me of my tinder-box, and I gathered some
+flints, of which there were a number lying round, before returning to
+my dwelling in the native town. I had kept my ability to make fire, so
+far, secret, but if my life was threatened I resolved to kindle a
+conflagration that would sweep the island.
+
+When the queen and her followers returned from the place of execution
+Melannie sent for me.
+
+"Have a care, Peter," she said. "We are ruled here by customs which may
+not be changed. Already Ackbau is jealous of the favour I have shown
+you. To go upon the mountain, which is forbidden country, may be made
+an argument in favour of thy death, from which even I cannot save you."
+
+I pleaded an excuse for infringing the taboo, but Melannie shook her
+head. Then she embraced me and begged me to forgive her ill-humour.
+
+"You will not leave me, Peter," she pleaded. "You are strong--stronger
+than Ackbau, and will protect me from him."
+
+"But you are queen, are you not?" I answered.
+
+"Yes, I am queen," replied Melannie, "but I do not love my people as I
+should do. I wish they would make Ackbau king, so that I might be free
+as others are."
+
+She tried to embrace me, but I disengaged myself from her. I could not
+take her to my heart, coming, as she did, a willing spectator from the
+place of sacrifice.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XIX
+
+I BECOME CHIEF COOK
+
+
+I now resolved to introduce the cooking of food upon the island. From
+the fish and clams which the natives offered me in their raw state I
+turned in disgust, but I reflected that, cooked, they would make
+excellent eating. I was tired of fruit, and craved a more substantial
+diet. How long I might be compelled to remain upon this island I knew
+not. Perhaps I was destined to spend the rest of my life upon it. Why,
+then, should I be deprived of the luxury of cooking my food, when, with
+my flint and steel, I possessed the means of making a fire?
+
+When I spoke of my intention to Melannie she failed to grasp my
+meaning. She had no notion of fire except in connexion with the smoke
+on the mountain, and when I told her I could make fire like that and
+convert it to my use, she became incredulous.
+
+"If you can make fire, Peter," she said, "you are greater than all the
+gods upon the island. Whoever heard of making fire?"
+
+In order to convince her, and to test the effect which my fire might
+have upon these islanders, I invited her to accompany me to a remote
+part of the island, seldom visited, where I had already constructed a
+fire-place and collected a quantity of fuel, of which there was an
+abundance lying round. She came with me fearlessly, for she trusted me
+entirely, and her intelligence, which was superior to the islanders',
+made her less superstitious than the savages over whom she nominally
+reigned. When she saw the dried wood and leaves I had collected in my
+fire-place she appeared to think I had become suddenly demented, as
+sometimes happened to the people on the island, when they were thought
+to be possessed by evil spirits.
+
+When I took up my flint and steel, however, and began to strike sparks
+on to the prepared tinder, she drew back alarmed, although her woman's
+curiosity conquered her desire to run away. But when the sparks
+lighted the dried leaves, causing the wood to crackle and burn, she
+would have fled if I had not detained her.
+
+"There is no magic in fire-making, Melannie," I said, trying to allay
+her fears; "all white men make fires. It is as necessary to them as air
+and water."
+
+But it was hard to convince the queen of this. She looked at my fire,
+which now burned brightly, with wonder and alarm. "Of a truth, Peter,"
+she said, "thy magic is beyond me. I know now thou art indeed come from
+the sun. No man born of men could work such marvel."
+
+I had brought with me a fine fish, caught that morning from the rocks,
+which I had sealed and cleaned with my dagger-knife, and I now toasted
+it over the hot coals, after which I enjoyed the most satisfying meal I
+had tasted since I had been cast upon the island. I induced Melannie to
+eat some of the fish, which she found so much to her liking that her
+fear of the fire changed to admiration for what it could do.
+
+"When my people eat of this delicious food," she said, "they will
+worship you."
+
+I had no desire to be worshipped. All I asked was permission to eat my
+grilled fish in peace. But Melannie was so delighted with her meal that
+she made me promise to prepare a fish each day for our mutual
+enjoyment. For some days we continued to dine by stealth. Fish were
+plentiful, and we also found the bivalves I had noticed on my first
+landing round the fresh water pools very palatable.
+
+At length our daily absence from the village, always at the same hour,
+excited suspicion, and spies were set upon us, who reported we were
+making another smoke mountain, which led to a surprise visit from
+Ackbau, who came upon us one day when our meal was preparing. I had
+made some rude vessels of clay, hardened by fire, in which to boil the
+shell-fish, and with these simmering in the pot, and a fine rock cod
+grilling upon the hot coals, we were awaiting our dinner with
+pleasurable anticipation, when Ackbau appeared.
+
+He was too astonished at what he saw to find fault, and when, later, he
+had eaten of grilled cod and boiled clams, seasoned with salt and
+cut-up bananas, a recipe which Melannie, with her woman's instinct, had
+invented for the preparation of this delicacy, he was so pleased with
+his food that he forgot to be ill-tempered.
+
+After this surprise visit from Ackbau our privacy was at an end. Next
+day the whole council came to dinner. They brought with them a quantity
+of fish and clams, which they wanted cooked, and it became necessary to
+make fresh fires, and to instruct them in the art of cooking. This was
+soon done, for the natives, when shown our simple methods, very quickly
+began to understand what was required of them, and they became so
+interested in the cookery that for the time being all other business on
+the island was suspended. Soon the whole tribe took part in the
+cooking, and fires burned all along the shore at which fish and clams
+prepared as Melannie directed were converted into luscious banquets for
+the astonished islanders. Nothing else was thought of but cooking and
+eating, and the natives often gorged themselves to such an extent that
+they were unable for hours to stir from the spot.
+
+This soon gave rise to disagreements and led to quarrels, until at
+length Ackbau, who in his own way was a born organizer, called the
+council together and enacted laws for the regulation of the cookery.
+
+By these laws cooks were appointed, of whom I was made chief, and it
+became an offence, punishable by death, for any except those duly
+qualified to indulge in cooking. Regulations were also made for the
+distribution of food, and each day, at stated hours, the tribe
+assembled round the fires, when they were served with their portions,
+which they greedily devoured. There were no birds upon the island, or I
+might have added game to our bill of fare, but turtles were plentiful,
+and, when captured, were cooked under my directions in a manner which
+convinced the savages that I was of divine origin. The method of
+fire-making I kept to myself, rightly conceiving that so long as I
+preserved this secret my life would be spared.
+
+But notwithstanding the improvement in their mode of living which I had
+brought to these people by the introduction of the use of fire amongst
+them, I could see that Ackbau still regarded me with disfavour. His
+cruel nature, moreover, began to suggest to him another use to which
+fire might be applied. One of his slaves inadvertently picked up a
+burning brand, which burnt his fingers, and the pain which it caused
+suggested to Ackbau that fire might be employed in torture. He ruled by
+fear, and the fear of fire had now become universal among the
+islanders. Ackbau spoke to me privately with regard to the making of
+this new element, and even offered to give me a seat on the council if
+I would surrender to him my flint and steel, but I told him that to me
+alone was committed the power of making fire, and that any other
+attempting it would bring upon himself inevitable disaster. Ackbau's
+ambition to become a fire-maker was checked for the moment, but I could
+see it was not satisfied.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XX
+
+THE SNAKE GOD
+
+
+I was now to meet with a surprise. The chief deity worshipped by the
+people of the Island of Gems was a snake god, a monster who at regular,
+intervals visited a coral cave rising out of a pool of water said to be
+fathomless, from which I conjectured it was connected with the sea. The
+water in this pool was of a deep blue colour, salt to the taste, which
+further convinced me of its link with the ocean. On the first night of
+each full moon a human sacrifice was offered, with which the monster
+retreated into the coral cave, where it remained feasting upon its
+victim three days. During this period the natives continued without
+sleep, and fasting. At the end of three days the snake god disappeared,
+nor was it seen again until its next periodical visit.
+
+There ran, a legend among the people of the Island of Gems that if a
+human sacrifice was not made to the snake god at the time of its
+coming, the island would be destroyed and its people exterminated, so
+that great care was taken to provide the monster with its accustomed
+tribute. Prisoners of war, and all strangers found upon the island,
+were, in the first place, offered to the snake god, and, failing these,
+a victim was chosen among the tribe.
+
+It now appeared, so far as I could gather from Ackbau, who made no
+secret of his intentions regarding me, that had it not been, for the
+arrival of another stranger upon the island, I myself would have been
+offered as a sacrifice to the snake god at his next coming, and it was
+for this reason I had been received with apparent friendship. But a
+fresh captive being taken soon after I had been washed ashore had
+caused a change of plan very much to my advantage. Queen Melannie also
+had interested herself in my favour, and had refused to speak words at
+the secret council which would have decreed my death. But I might
+assure myself, said Ackbau, that my fate was only delayed, and at the
+coming of the snake god, next after the one immediately expected, my
+death had been decided upon. I appealed to Melannie, but she could only
+confirm what Ackbau had told me.
+
+"I cannot save you, Peter," she said, "unless you will become my
+husband, when, if you are strong, we may overcome Ackbau, and rule as
+king and queen upon this island. But if that cannot be, let us escape
+by a means that I know of."
+
+I put aside the question of marriage, but I eagerly embraced the
+proposal to escape.
+
+Melannie then led me, secretly, by a path known only to Ackbau, the
+council, and herself, to a rock cavern close to the water's edge, in
+which was kept a ship's boat, which the queen told me had been washed
+ashore at the same time when, she was found crying upon the beach. It
+was a well-built, serviceable cutter, with spare oars, and a sail
+stowed under the thwarts, just as they had been placed in her when she
+had put to sea, but there was neither food nor water in the boat,
+although I discovered a water-tank forward, which could readily be
+filled from one of the many streams on the island. I became so excited
+at the prospect of escape that Melannie looked grave.
+
+"You are glad to go, Peter," she said. "Go, then; take the boat, and
+leave me to my fate."
+
+"Not so, Melannie," I answered. "I will take you with me, and restore
+you to your own people. It is not meet that a white girl, such as thou,
+should abide with savages."
+
+At these words Melannie recovered her gaiety.
+
+"Let me go with thee, Peter," she said, clapping her hands with
+pleasure. "It is all I ask. But if we would not be followed by war
+canoes, which could easily overtake us, we must use much cunning in the
+manner of our going."
+
+We then took counsel together, when Melannie advised that our best
+chance to escape would be at the time of the coming of the snake god.
+When the monster appeared, and for three days afterward, while it
+remained in the coral cave, the savages would be held to the spot by
+their traditions from which nothing would induce them to depart. We
+might then slip away unobserved, and be out of sight of land before the
+ceremonies in connexion with the sacrifice were over. This appearing to
+be our opportunity, we at once set about making preparations. From a
+stream near the cave I filled the boat's water-tank, and we collected a
+quantity of coconuts, bananas, and other fruits, which we stowed on
+board; nor did I forget to take some of the largest gems from the
+treasure cave, which I stuffed into my belt with the others. The gold I
+did not touch. It was heavy to carry, and its transport might have
+caused suspicion. We also launched the boat, with some difficulty, into
+a natural boat harbour formed by a coral reef, so that no time might be
+lost in getting away. All being ready, we waited impatiently for the
+day upon which we had planned to set out upon our voyage.
+
+During this time I observed a change upon the mountain in the centre of
+the island. The smoke cloud, which always hovered over it, had
+increased until it hung like a funeral pall over the top of the
+volcano. Loud rumblings also were heard like distant thunder, while
+earth tremors were constantly felt. I mentioned these matters to
+Melannie, but she did not appear to attach any importance to them.
+
+"The mountain was always like that," she said. "Perhaps the evil
+spirits who live there are angry." But I knew from my reading and
+experience that these signs and portents were such as heralded an
+eruption. In the excitement of leaving the island, however, I forgot my
+anxieties with regard to the volcano.
+
+I now questioned Melannie with regard to the white stranger whose
+coming had saved me from being offered as a sacrifice to the snake god.
+At first she refused to tell me anything concerning him, but when I
+pressed her she conducted me to a cavern in which the captive was
+confined. The door of this dungeon was a swinging rock, which Melannie
+caused to open by some means of which she knew the secret, when the
+wretched man who was reserved for the sacrifice was seen crouching in
+darkness at the farther end of the cave. He came toward us bent double.
+There was a scared look upon his face. The light dazzled him. I knew
+him at once, and held my breath. It was Van Luck. When he saw me he
+threw himself upon his knees and implored me to save him, but I told
+him I had no power to avert his death even if I would. In answer to my
+question as to how he came upon the island, he answered, that almost at
+the same time as I had been washed overboard he himself had been
+precipitated by a wave into the sea.
+
+"Well, Van Luck," I said to him. "It seemeth to me that the hand of
+Providence is in this business. But for your conduct we had both now
+been on board the 'Arms of Amsterdam,' yet no sooner was I cast into
+the sea by your treachery than you were made to follow me, to be
+brought to this island, where, but for your coming, I would have been
+subject to the cruel fate which now awaits you."
+
+"Mercy!" he cried. "I do not fear death. But the death that I am to
+suffer is not for a human to contemplate. If you cannot save me, at
+least kill me, so that I may escape the torture of being devoured
+alive."
+
+But I was powerless to aid him, and at a sign from Melannie, who was
+fearful lest our visit might be discovered, I stepped back, as the rock
+at the mouth of the cave returned to its place, and consigned the
+miserable captive to a darkness from which he would not emerge until
+the time for the sacrifice.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXI
+
+A PLAN OF ESCAPE
+
+
+I was now of two minds, whether to make terms with Ackbau or to
+endeavour to escape with Melannie from the Island of Gems in the boat
+we had made ready for sea. On the one hand was immediate safety, and
+the prospect of some ship calling at the island in which I might return
+to civilization. On the other was a hazardous journey alone with a
+young girl, who could not be expected to realize the dangers which lay
+before her. Was I justified, I asked myself, in exposing the queen to
+the tragedy which might await us upon the ocean? If captured I had no
+doubt that both of us would be condemned by Ackbau to a cruel death,
+and if we succeeded in getting away how should we exist until some
+chance vessel came to our rescue? I mentioned my fears to Melannie, but
+she would not hear of abandoning the project we had formed.
+
+"Let us go, Peter," she urged. "Nothing but death, or worse, awaits us
+here. As for you, at the next coming of the snake god after the one
+that is about to take place you will assuredly be offered as a
+sacrifice, for I may tell you that a solemn vow has been made by the
+council to that effect. While I, at the same time, am to be given in
+marriage to Ackbau, a fate from which I shrink more than from death.
+Why, then, should we exchange the chance of reaching the country you
+speak of for the tortures which must certainly await us here? Let us
+trust ourselves to the sea rather than cling to this land of sorrow. If
+we perish, we perish."
+
+I could not but agree that her argument contained much good sense, and
+I admired the courage with which she was ready to face the worst that
+Fate might have in store for us.
+
+"Let it be so then, Melannie," I answered. "May heaven deal with me as
+I deal with thee in protecting us both from evil."
+
+After arriving at this decision we agreed there must be no turning
+back, and it only now remained to await the night upon which the
+unfortunate Van Luck would be offered to the snake god in order to make
+good our escape. Meanwhile we were allowed to wander about the island
+together as before. Ackbau having obtained the decree of the council
+for my death, and his own marriage with the queen, could afford to
+wait, nor did he appear anxious to deprive Melannie of the pleasure
+which she found in my company, until I was removed from his path.
+Melannie, although arrived at woman's estate, was but a child at heart,
+and, as a child, he knew she would be content to let things drift until
+the moment for my execution was at hand, when it would be too late even
+for the queen to prevent it.
+
+I had now become much attached to Melannie, feeling for her as for a
+dear sister. Her love for me I could not return, since all my love was
+given to my betrothed, but next to Anna I loved Melannie more than
+anyone in the world.
+
+So far as the islanders were concerned, I was now left to my own
+devices. My fire-making had lost its novelty, and since it was
+discovered that one fire could be lighted from another my flint and
+steel had depreciated in value. In order to conciliate Ackbau I offered
+to explain to him the secret of my fire-making, but he answered coldly
+that he himself knew how to make fire by taking a burning brand from
+one fire and thrusting it among dried wood and leaves, of which there
+were great quantities on the island, as fire had never been alight
+there before.
+
+"But if your fire should go out you would not know how to light it
+again," I argued.
+
+"I will take care that it does not go out," answered Ackbau.
+
+The cooking also which I had taught them was easily performed by
+certain members of the tribe told off for that purpose, and I noticed
+that much secrecy was observed in the preparation of food. This secret
+was revealed to me in a startling manner when I unexpectedly came upon
+Ackbau and some members of the council seated together enjoying a stew
+of what I could see was human flesh. For, indeed, what else could it
+be, seeing there were no animals upon the island? I mastered my horror
+as well as I could, for I was now in great dread of these savages, who,
+since they had acquired the taste for meat, appeared to have become far
+more ferocious and cruel than before resorting to the dreadful practice
+of cannibalism. My discovery, however, made me more than ever
+determined to rescue Melannie from the companionship of these wretches
+who called her their queen. It was better, I argued, for her to die in
+her youth and innocence upon the sea, if Providence so willed, than to
+become the wife of such a man as Ackbau.
+
+I did not confide to Melannie my dreadful discovery, but she was not
+slow in noticing a change in the demeanour of the men with whom she
+formerly had daily intercourse. Those who had become eaters of human
+flesh avoided her, and even Ackbau seemed ashamed to intrude himself
+upon her.
+
+"What is it, Peter?" she asked me, and I read the questioning fear in
+her eyes.
+
+I did my best to pacify her, but I could see that the repugnance with
+which she regarded Ackbau now almost amounted to a mania.
+
+"I feel inclined to run from Ackbau when I see him," she said.
+"If he touched me I am sure that I would scream."
+
+"You will soon be beyond his power," I answered. "Do not think of him,
+and you will not fear him."
+
+"Oh, Peter, take me away, I am frightened!" she sobbed. "Do not let
+Ackbau and the others come near me. They have done something. I don't
+know what it is. But they are not as they were before they made the
+fire. Perhaps a curse is upon them for having stolen the secret from
+the smoke mountain."
+
+I tried to comfort her, but I could see that the poor child was greatly
+alarmed, and I determined to speak to Ackbau regarding the abominable
+practice in which he was engaged.
+
+"Had I known that my fire-making would have made a cannibal of thee,
+Ackbau," I said, "I would never have kindled the element upon this
+island. Fire is a useful and necessary article in the life of a good
+man, but it becomes a curse if put to evil purposes."
+
+"It is a curse then that will fall most heavily upon thee," answered
+Ackbau. "As for me, this is my country, and I am king of its customs."
+But although he pretended to resent my interference, I could see that
+Ackbau was ashamed of what he had done, and henceforth he avoided
+Melannie, and seldom entered the queen's presence, so that I gained
+what I had in view by remonstrating with him.
+
+The thought of the fire, however, and the effect which the making of it
+had upon these savages, set me pondering whether this element was
+really the primary cause of cannibalism.
+
+No savages whom I ever met devour raw flesh, whether human or animal,
+so that the eating of meat by men would seem to be an acquired habit.
+Fruit and water appear to be the natural food and drink of man, all
+else being artificial and vicious.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXII
+
+THE NIGHT OF THE SACRIFICE
+
+
+At last the night came when the snake god was to appear. The moon shone
+with wonderful brilliancy, sending a path of dancing light from the
+island across the sea to the horizon. The air was heavy as though
+presaging a storm. On the mountain the black pall was conspicuous
+against the star-spangled sky. A red glow from the crater illumined the
+dark smoke-cloud hanging over it. The silence was broken by the
+continued playing of reed pipes, making wonderful music. Melannie sat
+upon a throne, close to the pool in front of the coral cave, in which
+the stars were reflected as in a mirror. Ackbau and other chiefs stood
+near her. The queen was pale, but her dark eyes were resolute. She
+smiled when I looked at her, to give me encouragement. Her subjects
+were assembled round the pool in a triple line. Presently the beating
+of a war-drum announced the arrival of a procession, which advanced
+slowly to the pool, bearing a litter upon which, bound hand and foot,
+was stretched the unfortunate Van Luck. When they had come to the edge
+of the pool they set the litter down and withdrew.
+
+I had no cause to love Van Luck, yet there was something in his
+helpless misery which appealed to me, and made it impossible for me to
+abandon him to his fate without an effort to save him. Besides, he was
+of my race, a white man. I could not leave him to be butchered by
+savages.
+
+And now the waters of the pool began to be agitated by the rising of
+the leviathan from its depths, and suddenly a monstrous head, mounted
+upon a neck full twenty feet long, rose out of the water. The body of
+the creature resembled that of a turtle, only ten times larger than.
+the biggest turtle I had ever beheld. Thrice the monster circled the
+pool. Then it began slowly to approach the litter upon which Van Luck
+lay, more dead than alive with the terror that had come upon him. I
+could bear no more, and, throwing prudence to the winds, I ran to help
+him. I was just in time to drag him beyond reach of the monster, who
+made a rush to the edge of the pool when he saw his prey being taken
+from him.
+
+A great shout arose from the savages, who seemed amazed at the act of
+sacrilege I had committed. The reed pipes stopped playing. Melannie
+rose from her throne pale and trembling. Ackbau advanced towards me
+with a threatening gesture.
+
+"This must not be, Ackbau," I said, pointing to where Van Luck lay at
+my feet gazing at the monster in mute terror. "I will prevent it."
+Ackbau gave some directions, when a number of savages advanced,
+evidently with the intention of taking me alive, so that I might be
+given to the monster, which continued to swim round the pool lashing
+the water into foam, and stretching its neck from side to side in anger
+at having been robbed of its prey.
+
+But now a new diversion arose which caused a panic among the savages.
+We had all been so engrossed by what was taking place at the pool that
+no heed had been given to the mountain. With a mighty roar which shook
+the island to its foundations the volcano broke into eruption. The
+crust had given way, and the internal fires, held in check, belched
+from the crater. Huge rocks and stones glowing red hot were thrown to
+incredible heights. The earth rocked and opened, so that many were
+engulfed.
+
+Streams of lava began to descend. The pool sank, leaving a deep pit
+into which the monster disappeared. The prophecy was about to be
+fulfilled. The snake god had been robbed of its tribute, and the island
+with all upon it was to be destroyed. In, their terror the savages
+raced for the seashore. Nothing was remembered but self-preservation.
+
+I now released Van Luck from his bonds, and bidding him and Melannie
+follow me, I led the way along the secret path to where the boat lay,
+ready to put to sea. I was rewarded for my rescue of Van Luck by his
+ability to help me. Not a breath of wind stirred, so that we could not
+use the sail, and it became necessary to sweep the boat with the oars
+away from the burning island. Alone I could not have accomplished this,
+and I doubt if Melannie could have helped me, ignorant as she was of
+the use of the heavy oar. But Van Luck and I had no difficulty in
+sweeping the boat out to sea. Thus does Providence recompense a
+merciful action.
+
+When we had gained a safe distance from the island we rested awhile in
+order to look back on the strangest and most terrific sight I had ever
+beheld. The island seemed to be blown to atoms. Flames and masses of
+rock shot up from the quickly-widening crater until the island, which
+had lately risen like a beauty-spot in the ocean, became a mass of
+fire. The lava, now pouring in red-hot streams into the sea, caused
+steam-clouds to rise, so that the island disappeared behind a luminous
+veil. None of the savages escaped, for we saw no canoes making from the
+shore. Thus vanished the Island of Gems, with its treasure of jewels
+and gold, the dross of the world, in the pursuit of which so many risk
+their lives.
+
+A light breeze now coming from the south-east, we hoisted the sails,
+and taking the helm, I placed Van Luck in charge of the foresail,
+whilst Melannie and I sat together in the stern. The queen did not
+appear to regret the loss of her country.
+
+"I am queen no longer," she said, clapping her hands at the thought of
+her freedom. "Ackbau cannot frighten me any more, nor shall I see again
+those dreadful sights I was compelled to witness."
+
+"You will be happy," I whispered, "among your own people. You will be
+rich also, for half my jewels will make you wealthy in the land to
+which you are going."
+
+"Nay, Peter," she answered. "I need not take your jewels. I have jewels
+of my own. When I saw that you valued the bright stones, I knew they
+would be of value to me also. I have a bagful of jewels, larger than
+yours, and brighter." And, laughing to see the surprise she had given
+me, Melannie drew out a handful of gems from a bag which she carried at
+her girdle, which glowed with a wonderful lustre under the light of the
+moon.
+
+It was then that I saw Van Luck watching us from the bow of the boat.
+His countenance wore a cunning, greedy look, and his eyes were fastened
+upon the jewels in Melannie's hand.
+
+"Put them away," I whispered. "Such toys are often the cause of much
+trouble."
+
+Melannie replaced the jewels, but seemed disappointed at my words.
+
+"I thought you would be glad I had brought away the bright stones," she
+said. "But if they are unlucky I will cast them into the sea."
+
+"Nay, Melannie," I answered. "Keep them, for they will make you the
+richest among the women of your own country. But do not show them to
+anyone or let it be known that you have them with you, should we fall
+in with a passing ship, or they may cause our ruin, perhaps our death."
+Melannie seemed to understand me, but her pleasure in the bright stones
+had received a check since her display of them had brought a rebuke
+from my lips.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIII
+
+AT THE MERCY OF THE SEA
+
+
+When morning broke on the day after our escape from the burning island
+we shaped a course with the wind, for I had no fixed purpose, and our
+only hope of returning to civilization lay in a chance meeting with
+some passing vessel. Yet I knew how remote that chance would be. The
+sea in these latitudes was not in the course of trade between any of
+the countries of the known world, and voyages of discovery such as
+those undertaken by Dirk Hartog and other navigators of the time were
+few and far between. Still I conceived it to be my duty to make the
+best use of the means which Providence had placed in my hands of
+returning to home and friends, and as the cutter danced over the waves,
+and the salt spray moistened our faces, I felt my spirits rise.
+
+Melannie, in her new-found freedom, was like a happy child.
+
+"Let us sail on for ever, Peter," she said. "I never want to put my
+foot on land again."
+
+I tried to tell her that we could not live long upon the ocean; that
+our food and water would fail us; and that unless we fell in with a
+ship, or landed upon some friendly island, our doom was sealed. But
+Melannie refused to look upon the graver side of our situation, and
+seemed so happy and contented that I did not like to spoil her
+enjoyment with my dismal forebodings. Time enough, I thought, to meet
+trouble when it comes. Meanwhile we continued our voyage as a pleasure
+trip, eating the fruit we had brought with us when we felt hungry, and
+quenching our thirst from the boat's water-tank, with no care for the
+future.
+
+During this time Van Luck resumed his former air of abstraction, which
+I had noticed in him on board the "Arms of Amsterdam". For hours at a
+time he would remain silent, looking across the sea with his hand
+shading his eyes in the watchful attitude which had become habitual to
+him during his solitary vigils at the island upon which we had found
+him. If spoken to when this fit was upon him, he would not answer, nor
+did he, at such times, appear to realize where he was. I could see that
+his mind was deranged, and I dreaded some violent outbreak, such as
+that which had come over him when, by his treachery, I was cast into
+the sea. But Melannie showed no fear of him; in, her delight at being
+with me upon the ocean away from the savages, among whom she had been
+reared, she seemed to have forgotten his presence.
+
+For the next week after leaving what had been once the Island of Gems,
+we experienced a spell of fine weather, with bright sun and cool
+breeze. The elements seemed kind to the exiled queen without a throne,
+who had trusted herself to the wind and the sea, and but for the
+anxiety which I felt for the future, the voyage would have been a
+pleasant one.
+
+In order to protect Melannie from the heat of midday, and to ensure her
+some measure of privacy, I constructed a temporary cabin for her, with
+some spare canvas which I found on board the boat, but at night she
+preferred to sleep in the open so that she might watch the stars, which
+shone with extraordinary brilliancy. It was then that I lowered the
+sails when our boat drifted upon the moonlit sea. Melannie would at
+such times creep into my arms, and with her head pillowed upon, my
+breast would listen to the wonders I had to tell of the world of white
+people to which I hoped I was taking her.
+
+"Something warns me I shall never see that country, Peter," she said to
+me one night with a sigh, "but I like to hear you speak of it. It must
+be a happy land where there are no black men to frighten a poor girl
+and make her weep. But I shall not see it. The white spirits would not
+welcome me to their country if they knew of the sights I had seen and
+the pain I had caused to be inflicted on those whom Ackbau hated."
+
+"It was not your will, but Ackbau's, Melannie, which caused such
+suffering," I answered. "None could blame you for being the mouthpiece
+of his villainy."
+
+But Melannie shook her head.
+
+"The white man's country is not for me, Peter," she declared
+sorrowfully. "I am too steeped in blood to take the white girls' hands
+in friendship."
+
+Then she clung to me weeping, with her head upon my breast, and so she
+would sob herself to sleep like a child disappointed in play.
+
+But, knowing her history, I could not find it in my heart to blame her
+for what had been done at the dictation of others. I pictured her a
+queen, among the whites, by reason of her wealth from the sale of her
+jewels, who would doubtless have many noble suitors at her feet. Her
+beauty was such as I had never seen equalled, and her imperious and
+sometimes wilful ways only added to her indescribable charms.
+It was now forced upon me that unless help came soon we must starve.
+Our stock of fruit was almost exhausted, and scarce three quarts of
+water remained in the tank. I had not been able to impress upon
+Melannie the necessity for economy in our eating and drinking. She had
+always been used to an abundance of simple fare, and, like a child,
+lived for the hour, with no thought of the future. Van Luck had also
+been in the habit of helping himself to what he wanted from our stock,
+nor had I liked to interfere with him lest I might cause trouble. But
+now I resolved to take a firmer stand with both my passengers.
+
+To add to my anxieties I could see that Van Luck had been attracted by
+the bag of jewels which Melannie had so imprudently displayed on the
+night of our escape from the burning island. He was continually
+watching it when his eyes were not employed in gazing across the sea,
+and once I caught him creeping toward Melannie when she slept as if
+with the intention of robbing her of the treasure. I spoke to him
+roughly, and ordered him back to the fore part of the boat. He obeyed,
+but his looks were so threatening that I momentarily expected him to
+attack me.
+
+I now determined to keep awake while Melannie slept in order that I
+might watch Van Luck, and I impressed upon the queen that she must
+never sleep when I slept. Thus we continued for some nights, keeping
+watch and watch about. But I soon found I could not trust Melannie, for
+when I awoke I discovered her to be asleep. But in this, as in all
+else, Melannie was such a child that I could not find it in my heart to
+scold her.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIV
+
+HOW MY SECOND VOYAGE ENDED
+
+
+I now resolved to place Van Luck under restraint, for it was plain to
+me he was not responsible for his actions, and with this object in view
+I went forward one morning with a rope in my hand, intending to secure
+him in some way from harming himself and others. As I approached him
+Van Luck, who seemed to divine my purpose, drew back with a savage,
+animal-like growl. I tried to pacify him by speaking kindly, but he
+suddenly sprang at me with a knife in his hand. I caught his arm before
+he could strike, and we fell together upon the thwarts of the boat,
+locked in a deadly embrace. Van Luck was a powerful man, and his
+madness seemed to give him double strength. I called to Melannie to
+keep away from us, but afraid for my safety, and fearless of her own,
+she hurried to my assistance. "Get my knife," I whispered, for I was
+unable to draw it myself from its sheath by my side. The brave girl
+stooped to do my bidding, when the madman, at the same moment, wrenched
+his arm free and struck her. Melannie fell with a low moan upon the
+thwart beside me, and Van Luck, snatching the bag of gems from where it
+hung at her girdle, retreated with his prize to the stern.
+
+I was soon upon my feet, and lifting Melannie into a more easy
+position, I turned my attention to Van Luck. He was sitting in the
+stern, handling the gems and mumbling over them, and when he saw me he
+clutched the bag, and, springing up, made as though to run from me,
+unmindful of the fact that we were tossing in mid-ocean. Without
+turning his head from looking back at me, he stumbled blindly into the
+sea, where he soon became lost amid the grey waves that rose on every
+side.
+
+When I returned to Melannie I could see that she was sinking fast. I
+did my best to staunch the blood which flowed from her breast. But her
+whitened face, upon which the dews of death were gathering, warned me
+she had not many moments to live.
+
+"Kiss me, Peter," she whispered. "It is better that I should go. You do
+not love me; you cannot love me as I love you. There is some one else
+whom you love. I know it; I have felt it. Go to her, Peter, but do not
+quite forget me."
+
+These were her last words, and, when I kissed her, Melannie, Queen of
+the Island of Gems, had crossed the waters of the Great Divide. Next
+day I consigned her body to the deep wrapped in her robe of white tapa
+cloth which formed her shroud.
+
+I was now alone upon the waste of waters, with barely three days'
+provisions between me and a slow and painful death. To add to my
+anxieties I could see that the weather, which had been calm and fine
+since my leaving the island, was about to change. Storm clouds gathered
+on the horizon. The sun was obscured. Rain fell, and the wind rose
+until it blew with the force of a tempest. I managed, with difficulty,
+to unship the sail, and devoted myself to baling the boat, which
+threatened at any moment to be swamped by the green water which came
+aboard of her. All that day, and the next, I was driven by the storm
+whither I knew not. The fruit which remained from our store was now
+rendered uneatable by reason of the salt water, in which it washed from
+side to side as the boat tossed and buffeted upon her way. A was
+famished and numb with cold. Yet, even in my extremity, I clung to
+life, and my last act of consciousness was to secure myself by a rope
+to the thwart upon which I lay.
+
+I was brought back to life by a flask of spirits held to my lips, and
+upon opening my eyes I became conscious of a bronzed, kindly face
+looking down at me in the water-logged boat.
+
+"Hold up, lad," said my preserver in English, a language with which I
+was well acquainted. "We'll have you aboard the 'Seagull' in a jiff,
+and to-morrow you'll be as fit as a buck rat."
+
+I then saw that a ship's boat was alongside the cutter, manned by four
+men. The weather had by this time moderated, but the sea ran high. It
+was therefore no easy matter to shift me from the cutter into the boat,
+for I was helpless and weak as a child from exposure to wind and sea.
+But willing hands at length effected the transfer, when we made for the
+"Seagull", which lay hove to half a mile distant.
+
+On coming aboard this vessel I was taken below and treated with great
+kindness, when, after my wet clothes had been set to dry, I was put
+into a warm bunk, a bowl of hot soup being brought to me, which, when I
+had taken it, sent me into a sound sleep. I awoke much refreshed, and
+on resuming my clothes I was glad to find that the belt in which I
+carried my jewels had not been interfered with. I thought it more
+prudent not to make mention of these gems, for I well knew that if they
+were found upon me I should not be allowed to keep them. The captain,
+having heard so much of my story as I chose to tell, promised me a
+passage to England, whither his ship was bound.
+
+I found the crew of the brig "Seagull" to be a rough lot, of mixed
+nationalities, but Captain Bland, who was in command, was an Englishman
+returning home after a voyage of two years in these latitudes. Upon
+learning my rating on the "Arms of Amsterdam" he made me his second
+mate, in place of one who had died shortly before my coming on board
+the brig.
+
+It may be imagined with what a thankful heart I welcomed a change from
+the companionship of savages to that of civilized men, and when I
+remembered the projects I had formed against my life I realized how
+unwise it is to become the arbiter of one's own fate.
+
+I voyaged in the English ship without mishap so long as we sailed upon
+uncharted seas, but when we entered home waters we kept a sharp
+look-out for pirates and free-booters, who at this time took toll from
+all whom they encountered. Off the coast of Africa we exchanged signals
+with passing vessels, from whom we learnt that pirates had been sighted
+in close proximity, and one morning we noticed two schooners bearing
+down upon us. As the wind was in favour of the pirates, for such we
+judged them to be, we could not hope to outrun them, our ship being
+foul after her long voyage, so the men were mustered and made ready for
+action.
+
+While these preparations were on foot I could not help admiring the
+cool and fearless manner in which the English sailors set about their
+work. There was no hurry or confusion in their methods. Each man knew
+his duty, and was ready to do it.
+
+With shouts and yells from the pirates on board of her, one of the
+schooners now ranged alongside, and the grappling irons were hove
+athwart our bulwarks. I sent a shower of grape from the gun, of which I
+had charge, upon the deck of the schooner, killing four of the pirates
+and wounding others, but this failed to stop the boarding party, who
+now swarmed upon us. The fight became general, and, led by Captain
+Bland, we engaged the robbers with such goodwill that we had almost
+succeeded in driving them over the side when the second schooner came
+up, and a fresh horde of ruffians joined in the attack. Retreating aft,
+we again made a stand, though it was evident that, in the end, we must
+be overpowered, outnumbered, as we were, three to one.
+
+Still we continued to fight on with no thought of surrender, for we
+knew that capture would mean death by walking the plank. Four of the
+English on our side were killed, besides seven or eight of those of
+other nationalities, whilst many were wounded. The decks were slippery
+with blood, and a gathering mist made it impossible to ascertain the
+extent of our losses. Captain Bland now placed himself beside me, and
+together we held the pirates at bay.
+
+"This can't last, Van Bu," he said, "and I am resolved that my ship
+shall not fall into the hands of these scoundrels."
+
+"What can you do?" I answered, without pausing in my defence.
+
+"I'll fire the magazine sooner than let them take her," replied Bland.
+"Keep them in check for a while and we'll sink together."
+
+With these words he sprang to the hatchway while I continued to fight
+on, expecting every moment to be blown with all hands into eternity.
+
+I had given up hope, and the suspense of awaiting the expected
+catastrophe was so acute that I had almost made up my mind to throw
+myself overboard and take my chance with the sharks, when two square
+sails emerged out of the smoke, and the hull of a man-o'-war, with a
+wide spread of canvas, ranged alongside, while a number of English
+man-o'-war's men, led by an officer, sprang upon our decks. At the sight
+of the King's men the pirates flung themselves headlong aboard their
+schooners, and endeavoured to make off, but they were soon captured and
+brought back, to be afterwards tried and hanged at the yard-arm.
+
+When the man-o'-war's men boarded us, I ran down the companion stairs
+in search of the captain, whom I found lying senseless at the foot of
+the ladder. Fortunately for him, and for all of us, he had been stunned
+by a blow from one of the pirates as he descended, and was thus
+prevented from carrying out his desperate resolve to fire the magazine.
+
+This was my last adventure upon the voyage, and some weeks later,
+without further mishap, we sighted a Dutch vessel bound for Amsterdam,
+to which, at my request, I was transferred.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXV
+
+I ARRIVE AT AMSTERDAM
+
+
+My first care after arriving at Amsterdam was to interview the
+goldsmiths with a view to disposing of the jewels I had brought from
+the Island of Gems, which proved to be of such value that I realized a
+considerable sum by the sale of a small portion, for I wished to keep
+some of the best as a wedding present for Anna.
+
+I lost no time in sending my compliments to the Count of Holstein, with
+a request that I might be allowed to call upon him. He consented to
+receive me, and I hastened to the Count's palace, where I found the old
+nobleman prostrated with grief at the continued and unexplained illness
+of his only child; but when Anna had seen me, and satisfied herself of
+my return, she recovered so rapidly that her father, on hearing from me
+my improved condition, and the sentiments which I entertained for his
+daughter, gladly gave his consent to our union.
+
+From Anna I learnt of the persecution to which she had been subject
+from Count Hendrick Luitken, which had mainly been the cause of her
+illness. Convinced that she would never accept him willingly, Count
+Hendrick, unknown to her father, had attempted to abduct her to his
+country estate. With the aid of one of her attendants Anna had made her
+escape, and believing me dead, while fearing further persecution, she
+had determined, should she be restored to health, to seek the cloister
+as her only safe refuge. As her tale proceeded I found it hard to
+restrain myself from starting off at once in pursuit of the villain who
+had treated my loved one so shamefully, and I promised myself to bring
+him to account when the opportunity should arise.
+
+I next sought Hartog at the tavern which I knew he frequented. When he
+saw me he cried out, "Is it you or your ghost, Peter? I had never
+looked to see thee again, lad. I'd sooner have thee back than salvage
+all the gold in the Orient."
+
+I thanked him for his welcome, which I knew to be genuine, and taking a
+seat at his right hand, I began to tell him of my adventures since we
+last met. When he heard it was owing to the treachery of Van Luck I had
+been cast into the sea to be washed ashore on the Island of Gems, and
+of the subsequent fate of the island and of Van Luck, he became so
+interested that he promised to meet me later, when I could give him a
+more detailed account of all that had befallen me. I offered to share
+with him my jewels, but to this he would not consent.
+
+"Nay, Peter," he said, "I take no treasure that I had no hand in
+getting. I am no pirate to rob a friend to whom chance and opportunity
+have proved kind, but if it would pleasure thee to give me a keepsake,
+I will wear one of thy jewels set as a brooch, as a reminder of thy
+goodwill. I am, moreover, in no need of money, for the gold we took at
+Cortes' island proved of greater value than I expected, and of this
+your share, together with the wages due to you, I will see to it is
+honestly paid by the merchants at Amsterdam. Besides, who knows we may
+sail together again?" But at this I shook my head.
+
+"No more voyages for me, Hartog," I said, "I have had my share of the
+rough side of life, and will now be content with the smooth."
+
+"And you not thirty!" laughed Hartog. "Nay, Peter, I'll never believe
+it of you, that having tasted of adventure, you will be satisfied with
+a humdrum life ashore."
+
+I was now rich by the sale of my jewels, and able to choose for myself
+my future mode of life. Count Holstein advised me in the disposal of my
+wealth, and a fine estate being for sale not far from his own, I
+purchased it.
+
+I urged my parents, who still resided upon the Island of Urk, where my
+father followed the occupation of a fisherman, to give up this mode of
+earning a livelihood and retire into private life, when I promised to
+make them a handsome allowance. But they would not consent to abandon
+their independence.
+
+"I am not an old man, Peter," said my father, when I spoke to him on
+the subject, "and I have, I hope, still many useful years' work in me.
+I have always been a fisherman. My father was a fisherman, and so was
+his father before him. Fishing is the only work I understand. It is
+honest work. Why then should I live in idleness upon thy bounty, when I
+can still play my part in the world?"
+
+I could not but see the force of his argument, so I contented myself
+with making my parents comfortable in the old home by adding many
+improvements which my mother desired but could not afford, while I
+presented my father with a new fishing-boat fitted with all the latest
+improvements.
+
+It is wonderful, the power of money. It brought a new happiness into
+the lives of my parents, and it made my mother look ten years younger.
+My father also, and my two brothers, who were all fishermen, had now
+come to regard me as the flower of the flock. Yet they had not scrupled
+to knock me about, with little ceremony, in the days of my boyhood; nor
+do I think they would have been behindhand in finding fault with me for
+my folly, had I returned from my second voyage as poor and needy as
+from the first. But such is life, and a man must take what comes, and
+make the best of it and not the worst; so I accepted my new role as the
+patron saint of my family with philosophy and content.
+
+Anna approved my parents' decision not to give up their independence.
+She came with me to see my mother, and I soon found that, as true
+women, there was no inequality between them. Anna had lost her own
+mother when she was too young to remember, and she clung to her new
+mother that was to be with an affection born of her loving nature.
+
+In a word, my jewels had brought me the only true happiness which
+wealth can give--the power of making others happy.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVI
+
+HAPPILY MARRIED
+
+
+I now resolved to bring Count Hendrick Luitken to account for his
+treatment of Anna, though I did not desire that Anna's name should
+appear in the matter, so that gossip might be avoided. I therefore
+bided my time, and waited an opportunity which soon came.
+
+The Count of Holstein had resigned the governorship of Urk, and now
+kept a fine establishment at Amsterdam, to which he frequently invited
+company, and at one of his banquets I met, as I expected, Count
+Hendrick Luitken.
+
+As a merchant's clerk, and afterwards as a seaman, the Count had taken
+no notice of me, but now that I was rich and betrothed to Anna, he
+could do no less than treat me with consideration when he met me at her
+father's house.
+
+The banquet was sumptuous, and no effort was spared to make it worthy
+of the late Governor's hospitality. Only men were invited, no women
+being present, so that free scope was given for the gluttony and
+drunkenness which usually prevailed at such entertainments. Great
+joints of beef and venison vanished like melting snow before the
+keen-set appetites of the diners, and goblets of wine disappeared down
+thirsty throats until all present were more or less under the influence
+of liquor. Toward the end of the entertainment, some horse-play was
+indulged in by the younger guests, among whom Count Hendrick Luitken
+was conspicuous. I could see he was the worse for liquor, and as often
+happens to those under the influence of strong drink, his veneer gave
+place to a quarrelsome arrogance in which his true disposition was
+displayed. Accompanied by some of his friends as boisterous as himself,
+he came over to where I was sitting, and, planting himself in a vacant
+chair on the other side of the table in front of me, he asked rudely
+how the fishing trade prospered at Urk.
+
+I felt the blood mount to my face as I answered that for all I knew to
+the contrary it prospered well enough, although I had for some years
+past been away from Urk, and could therefore not answer the question as
+fully as I might otherwise have done.
+
+"You've been a pirate since you gave up the fishing," sneered the
+Count, "and to some purpose if report speaks true."
+
+For answer I threw the wine which stood in a half-emptied goblet at my
+elbow in his face.
+
+The Count sprang to his feet, the red wine dripping from his handsome
+doublet, while his face worked with passion.
+
+"Insolent!" he cried, when he had mastered himself sufficiently to
+articulate. "My rank will not let me fight you, but I have influence
+enough to punish you as you deserve."
+
+"No difference in rank exists between us, my lord," I answered, "and I
+claim the right to cross swords in an affair of honour with all save
+those of royal blood. Grant me the satisfaction I demand, or I will
+brand you as a braggart and a coward throughout every town of the
+Netherlands."
+
+I could see that the Count changed colour at my words. As the son of a
+fisherman he could have pleaded his nobility as an excuse for not
+meeting me, and had me punished by the law, but he had forgotten that
+my betrothal to Anna carried with it a dignity equal to his own, or I
+doubt he had been so ready with his tongue.
+
+A hasty consultation was held among those who were with him, from which
+it appeared I was judged to be in the right, for presently the count
+turned and said to me, with a surly frown, "At dawn, then, in the
+courtyard," and quitted the hall.
+
+Such scenes were not uncommon at this time, and beyond a question or
+two in our immediate vicinity, but little notice was taken of what had
+occurred. But Hugh Bergin, a friend who offered to second me in my
+affair with the count, advised some rest before the hour of meeting,
+which was now almost at hand, for it was said the count was a skilful
+swordsman, who had never yet failed to kill or maim his adversary in a
+duel.
+
+Hugh Bergin and I were first in the courtyard at break of day, and here
+we were presently joined by the count and his seconds.
+
+Count Hendrick Luitken and I now stepped forward, and, the rapiers
+living been handed to us, we fell to the task of I trying to kill one
+another according to the rules of the duello.
+
+At first I parried the count's attack, in order that I might learn the
+extent of his boasted skill, but I soon found myself to be his equal,
+if not his superior, in sword play, for I had spent much of my spare
+time in the gymnasium at Amsterdam, where I had become the favourite
+pupil of the instructor.
+
+The count, I thought, seemed surprised at my cunning in fence, and lost
+the confident smile with which he had first, regarded me. Presently I
+felt the point of my rapier touch his tunic upon the breast, and, in my
+sensitive grasp, I knew that my blade had encountered steel. The look
+which I gave him must have conveyed to him the knowledge that I had
+discovered his treachery, for he set his lips and attacked me with even
+greater fury than before, but my blood was up, and I beat his guard
+down with such force that I was presently enabled, by a trick I had
+learnt, known as binding the blade, to wrest the weapon from his hand.
+The seconds would now have interfered, but my temper was not to be
+restrained, and, to the astonishment of those present, I seized the
+count by the throat, and, tearing open his tunic, laid bare a
+breastplate which he wore next his skin. No blow that I could have
+struck this cowardly noble would have hurt him so much as this
+exposure. With shamefaced looks his seconds led him away. This was the
+last I saw of him, for he soon after left Holland, and took service
+with the Spaniards, with whom he had long been in league. Some years
+later he was condemned as a heretic, and suffered death by torture at
+the hands of the Inquisition.
+
+Nothing now stood between me and my marriage with Anna, which was duly
+celebrated with much pomp at the Count of Holstein's town palace, after
+which Anna and I retired to my country estate, there to live, as I
+thought, the rest of our days in peace.
+
+Dirk Hartog, to whom I bade good-bye after the wedding, for his
+restless spirit was away again upon a fresh voyage, predicted I would
+one day become weary of inaction.
+
+"If ever the roving spirit comes over thee, Peter," he said as he wrung
+my hand at parting, "there's always a place for thee aboard my ship.
+Travel once tasted is a lodestone that draws the spirit from the
+cosiest corner to fresh adventure."
+
+But at this I shook my head. "Here is my lodestone," I said, and I
+pressed Anna to my heart.
+
+But who can foretell the future, or predict the decrees of Fate?
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVII
+
+ONCE MORE TO THE SOUTH
+
+
+Five years of wedded happiness followed my return to Amsterdam from my
+second voyage with Dirk Hartog into the Southern Seas.
+
+I had now come to regard myself as being past the age of adventure. My
+income was large, my estate substantial; and the wealth I had brought
+back with me from the Island of Gems, shrewdly invested by my
+father-in-law, the Count of Holstein, enabled me to maintain a position
+compatible with the dignity of the noble family into which, through my
+marriage with Anna Holstein, I was admitted a member. Nothing,
+therefore, was farther from my thoughts and inclinations than a return
+to the life of peril through which, in my younger days, I had passed,
+when suddenly the blow fell which changed all my plans.
+
+During the year 1630 an epidemic known as the "Black Death" raged
+through the Netherlands, and, as one of the victims to the fell
+disease, Anna, my wife, was taken from me. I followed her to the grave,
+and returned to my desolate hearth determined to die also. To this end
+I shut myself in the room which Anna had lately occupied, where I would
+permit nothing to be disturbed, nor would allow any to enter. Such food
+as I required was brought, by my orders, into an adjoining apartment,
+where I ate, when my appetite craved, in moody silence. Dust gathered.
+The air in the room became oppressive. I regarded this mournful chamber
+as my tomb.
+
+My servants, and those who had called themselves my friends, avoided
+me. I heard whispers at my barred and bolted door, saying that I was
+mad.
+
+A madhouse I knew to be worse than a prison. I therefore resolved to
+leave my home before I was prevented from doing so.
+
+How long I had remained in the state of misery and dejection to which I
+had abandoned myself I cannot say. It must have been some considerable
+time, for when, at last, I came out into the light, the sun dazzled me.
+None offered to stop me when I left the house. Many of my one-time
+servants had been discharged by my father-in-law, who had taken upon
+himself the management of my estates. The gatekeeper looked at me
+curiously when I passed his lodge, and that was all the notice
+vouchsafed me by my former dependents.
+
+I knew that Dirk Hartog had returned from the voyage upon which he had
+embarked soon after my marriage, and to him I determined to carry my
+broken heart. Only upon that mirror of mystery known as the ocean could
+I look for peace.
+
+I found my old commander in the cabin of the "Santa Isabel", an ancient
+Spanish vessel, reported to have voyaged to the south in 1595, when
+Mendana, a Spaniard, was sent out with instructions to establish a
+colony at the island of San Christobal, in the Solomon Group, and from
+thence to make an attempt to discover the Great Southern Continent.
+Mendana's fleet consisted of three large vessels and a frigate, and,
+since it was intended to settle a colony, many took their wives with
+them, among the emigrants being Mariana, the wife of Lope de Vega, who
+commanded the "Santa Isabel". The total number of men in the fleet was
+378, of whom 280 were soldiers. The "Santa Isabel" became detached from
+the rest of the fleet, and reached the Great South Land, where she
+spent five years in a harbour said to be of great beauty and
+extent--the finest harbour in the world.
+
+All this we learnt, from the log of the "Santa Isabel", though what
+became of the expedition, or of those who composed it, the record did
+not disclose. But the reading which interested Hartog most, keen
+treasure-hunter that he continued to be, was a paper describing some
+curious drawings he had found in one of the lockers of the vessel, of
+hands, some with six fingers, some with four, and others with only two.
+Under these drawings was the following inscription, translated into
+Spanish from some ancient language: "These hands are not carved upon
+the rocks, but are painted with a pigment that withstands the elements,
+and yieldeth not to time. They mark the measures of gold obtained."
+Then followed a rude chart giving the latitude and longitude of the
+place which Hartog professed his ability to find.
+
+"Join me, Peter," he said, "and let us ship together. There's treasure
+to be won, dangers to be passed, and forgetfulness to be had in the
+South. You are still a young man--in your prime. Is it fair that you
+should set yourself against that which plainly hath been decreed by
+Fate?"
+
+These words of Hartog moved me, as well they might, and I placed myself
+unreservedly in his hands. My father-in-law, when he was made
+acquainted with my desire to embark upon another voyage, offered no
+opposition. He was, I imagine, glad to be rid of me, perceiving that my
+moods ashore might interfere with the plans he had formed for the
+management of my estates. So, all being settled to our mutual
+satisfaction, Hartog and I went to work to equip our vessel, in which
+occupation I found relief from my sorrow, and became more reconciled to
+submit myself to the will of heaven.
+
+In three weeks our preparations were completed. A new ship was
+purchased, and commissioned without regard to cost. So much money was
+spent upon her that Hartog called her the "Golden Seahorse". She
+carried six guns, and a brass bow-chaser, with which Hartog declared we
+might make war upon the whole South Pacific in the event of our being
+forced to hostilities. A great quantity of arms and ammunition was put
+aboard, together with a supply of beads, knives, and bright-coloured
+cloths to barter with the natives. Berths were also found for Bantum
+and Janstins in the officers' quarters, and although Hartog and I were
+joint owners of the "Golden Seahorse", and shared equally in the profit
+or loss of the expedition, Hartog was given the supreme command.
+
+It was not until we had lost sight of land, and when I felt the call of
+the sea, that I ceased to mourn my lost Anna, and realized my
+obligation to live what remained to me of life in such manner as an
+all-wise Providence might determine.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXVIII
+
+THE MOLUCCA ISLANDS
+
+
+On this voyage to the place of the painted hands Dirk Hartog resolved
+upon a different route from that taken by former navigators to the
+Great South Land, and within three months of leaving Amsterdam the
+"Golden Seahorse" came to anchor among a group of islands to the north
+of New Holland known as the Molucca Islands, first visited by Sir
+Francis Drake in the "Pelican" during the year 1579.
+
+The competition between England and Holland for sea supremacy was at
+this time very keen, and the ships of both nations sometimes carried a
+broom at the masthead to signify the sweeping of the ocean. We found,
+however, no English or other vessels to dispute with us our landing at
+the Moluccas, where the King received us with some ceremony.
+
+Providing ourselves with presents, Hartog and I, attended by the ship's
+officers, went ashore to pay our respects to the King, who accepted our
+tribute graciously, and, looking up to heaven, said:
+
+"I know that nothing happens to men which has not, long since, been
+decreed by Fate. So bring your ship into the harbour and let your
+companions land in safety, in order that, after so much tossing about
+on the sea, and so many dangers, you may securely enjoy the comforts of
+life on shore and recruit your strength."
+
+Having thus spoken, the King laid aside his diadem, and embraced each
+of us in turn. He then directed such refreshments as the country
+produced to be set before us.
+
+The people of the Moluccas cannot be classed as savages. They possess
+an intelligence and form of government which lifts them above
+aboriginal natives. Each island has its king, who is, nevertheless,
+subservient to the chief Thedori, by whom we were received. This
+monarch is a man of small stature, but reputed wise beyond the wisdom
+of most men.
+
+Certain it is he made wise laws for the good government of his kingdom,
+one of which might, with advantage, be followed by law-makers in more
+civilized nations. This is the law which makes for peace. So long as
+the king upon each island maintains peace, his people show him almost
+divine honours; but, if he is anxious for war, they never rest till he
+is slain by the enemy in battle, and to this end they set him in the
+front rank, where he has to stand the whole brunt of the combat. His
+armies, moreover, do not exert themselves vigorously until they know
+that the king has fallen. Then they begin to fight for liberty and
+their new king. Since this law was enacted no king has entered upon a
+war without being slain in battle. Hence peace reigns, where formerly
+continued hostilities prevailed.
+
+The city of Porne, in which King Thedori reigns as paramount chief,
+consists of twenty thousand houses, all of which are low-built cabins.
+Some of the men who inhabit these dwellings have such long ears that
+they reach down to their shoulders, and when we expressed surprise at
+this, we were assured that on an island, not far off, there were men
+who had such large ears, that with one ear they could, when they liked,
+cover the whole of their heads. But Hartog disbelieved this story, nor
+would he visit the island when this prodigy was offered to be shown to
+him. We were not in, search of monsters, he said, but of treasure.
+
+We had been informed by one of the merchants at Amsterdam that when we
+should come to the island of Solo, one of the group of the Molucca
+Islands, we would find pearls as large as clove's eggs, but Thedori did
+not encourage us when we hinted to him our desire to possess some of
+these marvels. They were only to be found, he said, in very deep water,
+and this was not the season to obtain them. We decided not to press the
+matter, since we desired to leave a favourable impression, but Hartog
+promised himself a return visit, when, should friendly overtures prove
+of no avail, an appeal, might be made to the King's better judgment
+with the aid of our six guns and brass bowchaser. It is certain that
+pearls of great size do exist on these islands. The King wore one in
+his crown the size of a hen's egg.
+
+On our first night in harbour at the Molucca Islands we witnessed the
+most remarkable display I have ever beheld. The islands are well
+wooded, and amongst the trees by night, through the whole island, did
+show themselves an infinite swarm of fiery worms flying in the air,
+whose bodies, being no larger than common house-flies, made such a show
+and light as if every twig or tree had been a burning candle. In the
+dark recesses of the woods, also, appeared wonderful black bats, with
+red eyes, of which the inhabitants of this country stand in
+considerable dread. The bats are thought to be the spirits of departed
+kings, and none are allowed to molest them.
+
+From the security of our vessel, which lay close to the shore, we were
+able to view these marvels without danger, but the natives remained in
+their huts, afraid to venture forth, so that nocturnal dances, or
+meetings at camp fires, were here conspicuous by their absence.
+
+We now met with an adventure that was destined to influence our future
+in a manner we did not, at the time, foresee, or it is doubtful but we
+would have hesitated before granting an asylum to the miserable
+fugitive from King Thedori's tyranny, who now came aboard. Pedro de
+Castro, the name of this refugee, a Spaniard, informed us that for some
+time past he had been held as hostage by Thedori. Three years before
+our visit to the Moluccas, so ran his tale, a Spanish vessel, of which
+de Castro was first officer, had called at the islands. The captain and
+crew had been well received by the King, who had pretended the same
+friendliness towards them as he had shown to us. But so soon as a
+favourable opportunity offered, Thedori had looted the ship, and taken
+Pedro prisoner, declaring he would hold him to ransom, until his
+friends returned to Spain, from where they must send cotton, and other
+goods, not procurable at the Moluccas, in order to ensure his release.
+It was by this means that Thedori obtained many useful commodities of
+European workmanship, the presence of which we had noticed, with
+surprise, among his people. De Castro had contrived to escape his
+gaolers, and having swum aboard our vessel, he now besought us to save
+him from the miserable condition to which he had been reduced since his
+ship had sailed, leaving him dependent upon a vague promise of release
+from captivity, which he knew might never be fulfilled.
+
+"And mark you," he said, when we had assembled the officers in the
+cabin to hear his story, "Thedori will serve you as he served us, when
+the time is ripe for his treachery, for he possesses many guns, hidden
+away, together with a great store of ammunition, so that he could send
+an army against you that you would find it impossible to resist."
+
+We thanked Pedro for his warning, and since we determined to profit by
+it, we could do no less than offer him a berth among our officers. But
+I had no love for Spaniards or their ways, and I lived to learn that my
+distrust of them was not misplaced. That night we made preparations for
+departure, and, with the first breath of dawn, we hove our anchor
+aboard, and set a course for the open sea.
+
+When it was seen that we were leaving the island the utmost excitement
+prevailed on shore. The natives crowded upon the beach which bordered
+the harbour, while some put off in their canoes, making an effort to
+overtake us. But the "Golden Seahorse" was a ship very finely built,
+which caused her to slip through the water, needing but little wind to
+drive her at a rapid pace, so that we soon outdistanced our pursuers,
+and an hour later the Molucca Islands had disappeared beyond the
+horizon.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXIX
+
+THE VOYAGE CONTINUED
+
+
+We had been compelled, by reason of the treachery of Thedori, to leave
+the Moluccas without having obtained a supply of fresh water. This made
+it necessary to keep a sharp look-out for some island from which to
+replenish our tanks. On most of the islands in the Pacific water is
+readily obtainable. It is only upon the Southern Continent that great
+stretches of waterless country prevail.
+
+At length we sighted an island, the coast of which was rocky and
+barren. Through stress of weather we were compelled to keep off the
+shore, steering northward until, on the third day, the weather having
+moderated, we hove to as near to the coast as we dared approach, and
+endeavoured to land a boat's crew. In spite of breakers and a heavy
+sea, six of the sailors leaped overboard opposite a sandy beach, and
+with great difficulty reached the shore. Whilst searching for water the
+sailors saw four natives, who fled at their approach. They were wild,
+black, and entirely naked. Not finding water, the seamen regained the
+boat, bruised and half-drowned. Again we set sail, and next day we were
+off an island of considerable size, with two dangerous reefs stretching
+out into the sea. At length we managed to effect a landing, and fresh
+water being found, the ship was brought to anchor between the reefs,
+where some shelter was to be had, although the position of the vessel
+was by no means secure.
+
+Upon this island we fell in with a race of savages totally unlike any
+we had previously met with. These people have no houses or garments of
+any kind, and, setting aside their human shape, they differ but little
+from brutes. They have large heads, round foreheads, and great brows.
+Their eyelids are always half-closed to keep the flies out of their
+eyes, these insects being so troublesome that no fanning will keep them
+away; so from their infancy being so tormented, they do never open
+their eyes as other people do, nor can they see far unless they hold up
+their heads as if they were looking at something over them. They have
+great bottle noses, full lips, and wide mouths.
+
+They appeared to be quite indifferent to our landing upon their island,
+nor did they exhibit any fear or surprise at seeing us. We endeavoured
+to make them help us carry some water barrels to the boats. But though
+the barrels contained only six gallons each, and we put them on their
+shoulders, all the signs we could make to get them to carry them were
+useless. They stood like statues, without motion, grinning like so many
+monkeys. Having watered our vessel we once more put to sea.
+
+We were now, by our reckoning, somewhere in the vicinity of New
+Holland, and at six o'clock in the evening we shortened sail. We were
+then in twenty fathoms of water, when suddenly we again found ourselves
+in deep water, and believed all danger at an end. But in less than an
+hour, without warning, our ship struck on a rock, and remained
+immovable. Not being near to any shore we were well aware of the
+gravity of our position. We feared we had struck a submerged coral
+reef, and all sails were immediately taken in, and the boats lowered.
+We had struck just before dark, and at daylight I observed land some
+eight miles distant. High tide was expected at about eleven o'clock,
+when it was hoped the vessel would float off, though we feared she
+would sink in deep water.
+
+At twenty minutes past ten the ship floated, but the leak she had
+sprung gained on the pumps, and there was now three feet nine inches of
+water in the hold. The men were wearied to death. Each could only pump
+a few minutes at a time, and then sink exhausted upon the deck. At
+first we despaired of saving the ship, but eventually we got a sail
+drawn over the leak, and anchored seven leagues from the shore. Next
+day we found a safe place where the vessel could be moored near the
+beach, where, on examining the ship's bottom, we found that a large
+piece of rock had broken away from the reef and remained stuck in the
+hole it made. Had it not been for this singular fact the "Golden
+Seahorse" must have foundered.
+
+During the week which followed this adventure, which had almost proved
+disastrous to our voyage, we lightened the ship as much as possible,
+and made our camp ashore. We judged we had now come to the coast of New
+Holland, and since I had been the first to observe it on the morning
+after we had struck upon the reef, Hartog named that part of the coast
+Peter's land.
+
+The ship being safely careened, the carpenters set to work to repair
+the damage done to the hull by the sharp rocks, and, as this would
+occupy some time, we decided to overhaul our stores, of which we made
+an inventory. At this work we found the services of Pedro de Castro of
+great value. De Castro was a man well versed in figures, and able to
+enumerate with surprising facility. Indeed, I think he spent most of
+his spare time in mental arithmetic, calculating the riches and
+treasure which he hoped some day to obtain.
+
+One evening, when Hartog and I were seated together in front of our
+tent, de Castro brought us a paper which he said had been given him by
+a relative at Lisbon, who informed him that it was an extract from an
+ancient Portuguese manuscript, supposed to have been written by
+navigator Van Nuyts in 1467. The translation of this curious paper ran
+as follows:
+
+"Land of Gold. While some fishermen of Lamakera, in the island of Solo,
+were engaged in their fishing, there arose so great a tempest that they
+were unable to return to the shore. Thus they yielded to the force of
+the storm, which was such that, in five days, it took them to the Land
+of Gold, which is properly called the Southern Coast. When the
+fishermen reached the Land of Gold, not having eaten during those days
+of tempest, they set about seeking for provisions, and such happy and
+successful fortune had they after searching the country for yams and
+batatas, that they alighted on much gold in a cavern, enough to load
+their boats until they could carry no more, but, when they were ready
+to start loading, there came upon them so great a trepidation that they
+did not dare take any of the gold away with them."
+
+This further account of gold upon the Southern Continent strengthened
+our belief that treasure would be found at the place of the painted
+hands, to visit which our present voyage had been undertaken. But what
+could have caused the fishermen of Lamakera so great a trepidation we
+were at a loss to understand. Well, perhaps we would soon learn, for
+Hartog reckoned we were not many leagues north of the place marked upon
+the chart, which had encouraged us to embark upon this voyage.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXX
+
+A SPANISH SETTLEMENT
+
+
+The "Golden Seahorse" being now repaired and revictualled, we once more
+put to sea, and stood to the south at a safe distance from the coast
+for fear of again meeting shoal water. On the morning of the first day
+out we passed the shoal upon which we had so nearly lost our ship, it
+being but a spot of land appearing above the surface, with several
+rocks about it ten feet high, to be seen at low tide. It is of
+triangular form, each side one league and a half long.
+
+We now approached some formidable cliffs, which rose, like a gateway,
+shutting out the land beyond. It was here that Hartog reckoned we
+should find the place of the painted hands, if, indeed, such a locality
+had any real existence.
+
+The weather was now calm and fine, the wind fair, with a cloudless sky
+overhead, so that barely an hour passed from the time we observed the
+cliffs before we rounded them, when a sight appeared so unlooked for as
+made us wonder if our eyes had played us false.
+
+The coast along which we had sailed since first sighting the Great
+South Land had been so barren and desolate as to make the novel and
+attractive scene which now greeted us the more remarkable. Clustered
+together in a pleasant valley, surrounded by green hills, and facing a
+white sandy beach, were some two hundred houses, built of stone, and
+roofed with what appeared to be clay, of such extraordinary whiteness
+that it glistened, like snow, in the sun's rays. The herbs and grass
+around the town were green and inviting, while tall, straight trees,
+not torn by the wind, bore evidence of shelter from tempest which the
+hills provided. To add to the beauty of the scene, flocks of parakeets
+and bright-coloured parrots flew among the branches of the trees, while
+sweet scents, from many kinds of flowers, were wafted to us from the
+shore. On the beach we perceived a number of white people, dressed in
+the fashion of some thirty years before. Many of them wore ruffs and
+cloaks, which were now no longer the mode, and, to set our doubts at
+rest as to their nationality, the Spanish ensign floated from a
+flagstaff in front of the town. It was plain we had chanced upon a
+Spanish colony, probably of some of the people of Mendana's fleet, who
+had succeeded in forming a settlement in New Holland.
+
+Anxious to make a favourable impression upon our first landing, Hartog
+and I now donned our best, and the cutter, being manned, we were pulled
+toward the beach, where we could see that a number of Spaniards had
+assembled to receive us.
+
+On landing we stepped forward as the leaders of our expedition, when we
+were greeted with the most extravagant demonstrations of delight at our
+arrival, and were presently conducted by some of those whom we took to
+be in authority to one of the flat-roofed stone houses, somewhat larger
+than the others, where Donna Isabel Barreto, the ruler of the
+settlement, graciously welcomed us. From her we learnt the following
+strange story.
+
+The voyage of Mendana, as previously stated, had been undertaken with a
+view to colonization as well as discovery. After reaching the Solomon
+group the fleet dispersed. The "Santa Isabel", as her log informed us,
+spent five years in a fine harbour on the Southern Continent, from
+whence she had returned without establishing a settlement. Another of
+the ships and the frigate remained for a time at the islands, where the
+crews left many evidences of their visit. But it was reserved for us to
+ascertain what had befallen the "Concordia", the third of the vessels
+of Mendana's fleet. This ship, under the command of Captain Barreto,
+had reached New Holland, where the present settlement had been formed,
+and the town built. There were turbulent elements, however, among the
+crew, who had been allowed a license at the islands which their captain
+was not disposed to continue. He ordered the execution of some, before
+the rest were brought to submission. But there was sullen discontent
+remaining. To make matters worse, sickness broke out. It carried off a
+large number of the Spaniards, and Barreto himself died, as did his
+first officer. The pilot then claimed to take command, but to this
+Donna Isabel objected. As the captain's wife, she declared it to be her
+right to rule the settlement, and, marrying a young Spanish officer,
+Fernando de Castro, she assumed the title of queen, with Fernando as
+prince consort. To complicate matters still further, the pilot and
+those who were attached to him sailed away in the "Concordia", taking
+the infant son of Fernando and Isabel with them, and leaving the
+adherents of the queen marooned in this pleasant and fertile valley.
+Fernando, soon after the sailing of the "Concordia", died, since when
+Donna Isabel, who had resumed the name of Barreto, had reigned alone.
+This was, in brief, the story the Queen had to tell; and on hearing it
+Pedro de Castro threw himself at her feet, and claimed to be her son.
+
+Donna Isabel was now past middle age, being near forty years old, but
+she bore herself with a degree of uprightness and vigour which defied
+the advance of time. She was readily convinced of the truth of Pedro's
+statement, and when she had bidden him to rise she embraced him, and
+acknowledged him to be her son.
+
+"You have been led back to me," she said, "by the will of heaven, and
+by the courage of these brave men who shall henceforth be to me my
+brothers."
+
+Fair words, but lacking the ring of sincerity, as we were subsequently
+to find.
+
+Queen Barreto then begged us to consider her dominions at our disposal
+to the extent of all they contained. Houses were allotted us, and
+servants were instructed to place before us the best the country
+produced. We fared sumptuously, for the natural growth in this
+sheltered valley is surprising. The bread given us was made from three
+kinds of roots, of which there is a great abundance, and they grow
+without labour, receiving no more help than being dug up and cooked.
+These roots are pleasant to the taste, very nourishing, and keep for a
+long while. They are a yard long, and half a yard thick. The fruits,
+too, were numerous and good, consisting of oranges and lemons, which
+the Spaniards had planted, together with many earth-nuts, almonds, and
+other fruit, as well as sweet canes. Of live stock the settlers
+possessed goats, pigs, and a few cows. Round the houses were many fruit
+trees, with entwined palisades, by reason of the great quantity of
+pigs; the town was well arranged, the houses and yards being very
+clean.
+
+Queen Barreto kept Pedro with her in her own house, while Hartog and I,
+together with the officers and crew of the "Golden Seahorse", were
+suitably accommodated and made free of the settlement, where we enjoyed
+a run ashore after so much storm and stress at sea.
+
+We had not yet ascertained whether the settlers had been successful in
+finding gold in this place. Pearls and silver they possessed as
+evidence of their wealth, but we saw no gold among them. Pedro, who
+came to consult with us regarding this, informed us that his mother,
+the queen, had heard nothing of the place of the painted hands, or of
+gold being found there, but had told him that some years previously an
+expedition, sent to punish a tribe of natives who had proved hostile to
+the settlers, had reported the discovery of caves, very deep and
+mysterious, into which the natives could not be induced to enter,
+where, it was reported, gold was to be found by washing the sand from
+the bed of a subterranean stream which took its course through the
+caves from none knew where, and emptied itself into the sea.
+
+To these caves, therefore, now being rested and refreshed, we
+determined to direct our steps.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXI
+
+THE PLACE OF THE PAINTED HANDS
+
+
+Upon leaving the Spanish settlement, Queen Barreto provided us with an
+escort to guide us to the caves in which it was reported gold was to be
+found. The country outside the settlement was of the same rocky, barren
+nature as everywhere along the coast, while the natives we encountered
+were hostile and warlike. Armed with spears and slings, they attacked
+us, and were only driven off after many had been slain.
+
+Pedro de Castro did not accompany us. He had pleaded a disinclination
+to leave his mother so soon after their long separation. At the time we
+thought his conduct strange, but in return for the assistance that
+Queen Barreto had given us, we promised him a share of any gold
+obtained.
+
+At length, after a day's journey, we came to the entrance to the caves,
+a gloomy portal to a tunnel which ran into a high rocky cliff from
+which issued a sluggish stream over a bed of water-worn pebbles. At the
+entrance to this dark recess, upon the face of a flat rock, appeared
+painted hands, some with six fingers, some with four, and others with
+only two. They were painted with a dark brown pigment, and were easily
+discernible. It was the sight of these hands, and the assertion that
+they had reference to the measures of gold obtained, as set forth on
+the paper found by Hartog in the locker of the "Santa Isabel", that
+decided us to explore farther into the heart of the caves, and, having
+procured torches, Hartog and I, accompanied by Janstins and a lad named
+Bruno, a Mulatto, entered the tunnel, and made our way along the left
+bank of the stream.
+
+As we advanced the caves increased in size, until at length we stood in
+a great apartment, formed of colossal fluted pillars, and roofed high
+above our heads with depending stalactites which glistened in the light
+of our torches. Everywhere in this huge cavern the same mineral
+formation was to be seen, so that we seemed to be standing in a palace
+composed of glittering gems.
+
+The stream here was wide, moving sluggishly over a bed of black sand.
+Presently a cry from Janstins brought us to where he was standing
+beside a heap of what, at first sight, looked like yellow clay, but
+which, upon closer inspection, proved to be a quantity of gold dust,
+interspersed with small nuggets. Here, then, was the treasure collected
+by the fishermen from Lamakera, and abandoned by them in 1467, almost
+two hundred years before the date of our coming. But the cause of the
+great trepidation which had come upon them, so that they had been
+unable to carry the gold away, we had yet to learn.
+
+We had become so intent upon our gold discovery that we had failed to
+notice a peculiar humming sound, which became louder as it drew nearer,
+and suddenly we observed descending upon us, from the vaulted roof,
+what appeared to be white feathery clouds, which, however, speedily
+resolved themselves into a prodigious number of flying hornets. Bruno
+was the first to be attacked by these venomous insects. In a moment he
+was covered with them, and ran screaming into the water of the
+slowly-moving stream. His cries were pitiful, but we could do nothing
+to relieve him. In less than a minute he was stung to death.
+
+It now became imperative, if we would save ourselves, to make the best
+of our way out of the caves without attempting to carry off any of the
+gold we had found. The fate of the boy Bruno had caused a diversion
+among the hornets to which we probably owed our lives. In the hope of
+distracting them still further, we fired off our muskets, which awoke
+echoes in that silent place the like of which had never been heard
+before. Had we exploded a barrel of gunpowder, the sound of it would
+not have been louder nor the concussion greater, than was caused by the
+discharge of our firearms. Huge masses of stalactites fell from the
+roof, while the air space around us became filled with bats, and flying
+creatures with heads like foxes, disturbed from their slumbers by the
+discharge of our guns. The flapping of their wings drove off the
+hornets, and greatly aided us in our escape from a horrible death.
+
+On reaching the entrance to the caves, where we arrived more dead than
+alive from our adventure, we were met by those of our crew whom we had
+brought with us, but were informed that our guides had returned to the
+settlement. For this conduct the guides had offered no explanation.
+They had said they were acting in accordance with directions given them
+by Queen Barreto, and that, having brought us to the mouth of the
+caves, their mission ended. We did not at the time attach much
+importance to this desertion of us, being now well acquainted with the
+path over the cliffs into the valley, opposite to which our ship lay at
+anchor, so we did not anticipate any difficulty in returning. As we
+advanced, however, our journey was continually impeded by attacks made
+upon us by hostile natives, so it was not until toward the evening of
+the second day after leaving the caves that we succeeded in climbing
+the cliffs above the settlement. Judge then of our dismay when, upon
+looking seaward, we perceived our ship standing out from the bay under
+full sail, while at her mizzen floated the flag of Spain.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXII
+
+MAROONED
+
+
+As we stood upon the cliffs overlooking the Spanish settlement,
+watching, with blank faces, the "Golden Seahorse" sailing seaward under
+a foreign flag, it was borne in upon us that we owed our loss to the
+treachery of Queen Barreto, who, taking advantage of our absence, had
+pirated our vessel. On descending to the town our suspicions were
+confirmed. Here we found the settlement abandoned by the Spaniards,
+who, before leaving, had imprisoned our crew, bound and gagged, in the
+Queen's house. Having released them, we heard from Bantum, our second
+officer, the particulars of what had occurred.
+
+"No sooner had you left the town," said he, "than Queen Barreto, with
+Pedro de Castro and a swarm of Spaniards, came aboard of us. De Castro
+knew where the arms were kept, and, before I could guess what they
+intended, they had hoisted their flag at the mizzen, and held
+possession of the ship. We put up a fight, but what could we do,
+outnumbered as we were--ten to one? We were quickly overpowered and
+brought ashore, where they trussed us up and left us as you found us.
+Had you not come in time we would certainly have died of thirst and
+starvation."
+
+When we had listened to Bantum's account of what had taken place we
+could not blame him for the loss of the ship, but Hartog swore a great
+oath that, if ever he should meet de Castro again he would reckon with
+him in such manner as his base betrayal of us gave warrant. The
+ingratitude of this man will be apparent when it is remembered that we
+had rescued him from slavery, had admitted him to an equality with our
+officers, and had loaded him with favours, for which he repaid us by
+stealing our vessel.
+
+It now became necessary to review our situation. Of food and fresh
+water we had an abundant supply, and there were dwellings at our
+disposal more than enough, for the Spaniards had numbered over two
+hundred, while we mustered but thirty. We possessed, however, no arms
+or ammunition beyond what we had taken with us upon our expedition to
+the caves. The thought of this caused us grave anxiety when we
+reflected upon the small force at our disposal should hostile natives,
+having discovered our weakness, be tempted to attack us. Repining,
+however, would avail us nothing, so, at Hartog's request, I set about
+organizing our camp. Hartog himself was so cast down by the loss of our
+ship that he seemed incapable of diverting his thoughts from the
+catastrophe which had overtaken us. I thus found our former positions
+reversed, Hartog being on the brink of the same hopeless despair which
+had obsessed me when Anna was taken from me, while upon me devolved the
+task of heartening him.
+
+And now a new danger threatened us. We had not been a month at the
+settlement after the piracy of the "Golden Seahorse" before it became
+evident to me that our crew had ceased to regard their officers with
+the same respect as they had formerly shown them on board ship.
+Sailors, ashore, are accustomed to a license they do not look for at
+sea. Hence it was but natural that, since their ship no longer claimed
+their duty, they should regard themselves as freed from discipline.
+This revolt against authority, however, I knew to be a menace to our
+common safety, and I determined to put an end to it. I spoke first to
+Hartog, who spent most of his time in the Queen's house, brooding over
+our misfortune, and thus setting a very bad example.
+
+"It is not because you are no longer captain of the 'Golden Seahorse',"
+I said to him, "that you should regard your responsibilities at an end.
+If you can regain your authority over the men, we may yet win through.
+If not, then let us at once abandon ourselves to the mercy of the
+savages, whom, I may tell you, I have observed watching us from the
+cliffs above, and who are only waiting to assure themselves of our
+weakness before they attack us."
+
+For a time Hartog remained silent. Then he rose, and stretched himself;
+drawing himself up to his full height, he stood before me, the finest
+specimen of a man I have ever met.
+
+"You are right, Peter," he said. "I deserve the scolding you have given
+me. Show me the man who will not obey me, and I will talk to him."
+
+Now there was one, Hoft Hugens, a Swede, who had made himself a leader
+among the mutinous and lazy crew. I had intended dealing with this man
+myself, but it now occurred to me that his schooling would serve to
+rouse Hartog from his apathy.
+
+"If you must know, then," I answered, "it is Hoft Hugens to whom the
+men look as leader."
+
+The next minute Hartog was striding through the town, a native club in
+his hand, which he had taken from the Queen's house. Although past
+noon, there were none to be seen outside the huts. All were asleep
+after their mid-day meal, upon which they had gorged themselves to
+repletion. At the sight of this defiance of discipline a deep flush
+overspread Hartog's face, as though he felt shame for having allowed
+his authority to pass from him. Then he began to beat with his club
+upon the doors of the houses until the men came out, some in sleepy
+remonstrance, and others with curses in their mouths at having been
+disturbed from their siesta.
+
+"Well, what have you to say?" demanded Hartog. "Is it not enough that
+our condition is such that if only fifty determined savages came
+against us they could kill us and destroy the settlement, but you must
+waste your time in gluttony and sleep? Where is the watch, whose duty
+it is to keep a look-out as though I stood upon my quarterdeck?"
+
+"Nay, Hartog," answered Hugens, whom the others now pushed forward to
+be their spokesman, "there must be an end to such talk. We shall never
+get away from this valley. What need then for so much rule when death
+is certain?"
+
+"Certain it is for thee," cried Hartog, placing his hand on Hugen's
+shoulder, and tightening his grip so that the man winced with pain.
+"Ask pardon before I tear thine arm from its socket!"
+
+At this, those who had begun to advance to their leader's assistance
+drew back. It was known that the punishment which Hartog threatened had
+actually been carried out by one of the buccaneer captains upon a
+mutinous seaman, and none doubted but Hartog had the strength to fulfil
+his threat. Hugen's face blanched as the grip tightened upon his arm.
+He tried to free himself. Tears started to his eyes. A sob broke from
+his heaving chest. Then he screamed with the intolerable agony he
+suffered, but none dare interfere, and I verily believe that Hartog
+would have performed his promise and torn the limb from its socket had
+not one of the men, who had been looking seaward, cried, "A sail!
+sail!"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIII
+
+CAPTAIN MONTBAR
+
+
+The report of a sail having been sighted dispelled every other thought.
+Hartog released Hugens, and, hurrying to the Queen's house, shortly
+afterwards returned with his spyglass, with which he anxiously scanned
+the horizon.
+
+"God be thanked, Peter," he said presently, "our ship is coming back to
+us, convoyed by a frigate."
+
+So great was my joy at hearing these words that at first I could hardly
+credit the truth of them, but as the ships drew nearer we could all see
+that the smaller of the two was the "Golden Seahorse". The vessels
+sailed into the bay which formed the port of the settlement, and
+dropped anchor close to the shore, when a boat put off from the
+frigate, and was rowed toward the beach. The crew were smart, and the
+boat was fresh painted, while, seated at the stern, was a striking, yet
+curious, figure. His dress was that of a French exquisite, very rich,
+and trimmed with much gold braid. On his head was a curled wig of the
+latest mode, and a flashing diamond brooch adorned his lace cravat. On
+nearing the beach upon which we were assembled one of the sailors
+stepped into the water and waded ashore, carrying this gallant upon his
+back, who, being deposited upon a dry spot, so that his buckled shoe
+might escape damage from the salt water, gravely saluted us. Hartog
+then, stepped forward, when the Frenchman, for such we took him to be,
+addressed him as follows:--
+
+"I have come, sir," said he, "to restore to you your vessel, which I
+understand was stolen by Spanish treachery."
+
+"You are welcome," answered Hartog. "I thank Providence that my ship
+has fallen into honest hands. I have yet to learn to whom I owe its
+recovery. May I hope that you will favour me with your name?"
+
+"Montbar," replied the stranger, and at the mention of his name both
+Hartog and I started.
+
+"You honour us by your visit, sir," said Hartog, with a bow as graceful
+as that with which Captain Montbar acknowledged it. "Your reputation is
+known to all seamen as that of a brave man and a princely gentleman."
+
+Hartog then led the way to the Queen's house, where we proposed to
+confer together as to the circumstances which had occasioned Captain
+Montbar's arrival.
+
+Captain Montbar was known to us, and to most navigators at this time,
+as a French gentleman of fortune who, having heard of the cruelties
+practised by the Spaniards, had conceived an aversion against them
+which amounted almost to frenzy. He had heard of the buccaneers, who
+were known to be the most inveterate enemies of Spain, and, in order to
+join them, he fitted out a frigate which he placed at their disposal,
+together with his own services. The achievements of this frigate were
+so pronounced, and the Spaniards suffered so much from Montbar's
+exploits, that he acquired the name of 'Exterminator.' His intrepidity
+would never let him suffer the least signs of cowardice among those who
+associated with him. In the heat of an engagement he went about his
+ship, observing his men, and immediately killing those who shrank at
+the report of pistol, gun, or cannon. This extraordinary discipline had
+made him the terror of the coward and the idol of the brave. In other
+respects he readily shared with such of his men as showed spirit the
+great booty that was acquired by his fearless disposition. When he went
+upon these buccaneering expeditions he sailed in his frigate, his own
+property, nor would he take a lion's share of the treasure obtained
+from captured Spanish merchantmen, but divided it equally with those
+who formed his ship's company.
+
+Such was the remarkable man to whom we owed the restoration of the
+"Golden Seahorse".
+
+From Captain Montbar we learned the particulars connected with the
+recovery of our ship from the Spaniards.
+
+"I had been driven out of my course," he said, "by contrary winds, when
+we sighted a vessel flying the Spanish flag, which I am bound, by a
+solemn oath, whenever an opportunity offers, to destroy. I was about to
+sink her when I noticed an unusual number of people upon her decks,
+among whom were several women and children, and, since I war only with
+men, I sent a boat to demand the surrender of the vessel. This was at
+once agreed to. Her colours were struck, and my own hoisted at the
+mizzen. I then went on board to hold an enquiry, and decide what was to
+be done, when I found that the ship had been stolen from a party of
+Dutch navigators on a visit to this country. The object of stealing the
+ship was for the purpose of conveying the settlers, who had been
+marooned here for some years, to their homes. It was not difficult, in
+the crowded state of the vessel, to find many who were prepared to
+disclose the whole truth. Donna Isabel Barreto, who appeared to be a
+queen among these people, then offered to make terms with me,
+promising, if I would suffer her to continue the voyage, she would
+send, as ransom, a large sum of money, of which she professed to have
+command at Madrid; but, having some experience of Spanish promises, I
+declined this offer, preferring to retain possession of the ship I had
+captured, which appeared to be of good build and well found. I
+undertook, however, to disembark Donna Isabel and her followers upon
+the first land we sighted, which happened to be a desolate-looking
+island by no means comparable with this fertile valley. Isabel
+then threw herself on her knees, and implored me not to abandon her,
+and her people, to death by slow starvation, which the landing of so
+great a company on such an uninviting shore would mean. But I was
+obdurate. 'Be thankful,' said I, 'that your lives are spared you. It is
+not for me to interfere with the decrees of Fate. This punishment for
+having stolen their vessel from those who trusted you, and to whom you
+were bound by the laws of hospitality, has clearly been ordained by
+Providence. Land, then, and, by your submission in face of adversity,
+seek to atone for your treacherous conduct.'
+
+"The party being landed and left to shift for themselves, I resolved to
+continue my voyage to this place, of which I had been given the
+bearings, in order that I might restore to you your ship, for I take no
+booty except from Spain."
+
+We again thanked our generous visitor, nor could we do less than place
+ourselves and our ship at his disposal.
+
+"Come back with me, then," said Montbar, "and join our band. I have
+voyaged far into these southern latitudes in search of treasure, and I
+may tell you that the islands of the south are by no means comparable
+with those in the west."
+
+But at this we asked time to consider. Although we had no cause to love
+the Spaniards, we had no reason to hate them with the same inveterate
+hatred displayed by Montbar. Besides, in spite of the glamour that
+surrounded them, we knew the buccaneers to be no better than pirates.
+Still it seemed a poor return to make Captain Montbar for the service
+he had rendered us to refuse his request. While we hesitated between
+two minds what we should do, I bethought me of the gold dust at the
+place of the painted hands. We had never intended to abandon this
+treasure by reason of a swarm of insects, however numerous and venomous
+they might be. The fishermen from Lamakera had excuse for doing so,
+since they lacked the equipment to combat the pests which infested the
+caves, but, with the resources of a ship at our disposal, it would be
+strange if we could not devise some means to carry off the gold, share
+it with Montbar, and thus repay the obligation we owed him.
+
+I mentioned this project to Hartog, who at once fell in with my plan.
+
+"You are a wizard, Peter," he said, "for finding a way out of a
+dilemma. If we can get this treasure, and either share it with Montbar,
+or give it all to him should it not prove considerable, our debt will
+be paid, so that we may continue our voyage whithersoever our fancy
+leads us, but, with the price of the ship on my conscience, I could
+never regard myself as a free man. Montbar knows this.
+
+"It is the rule of the sea that captured vessels are spoils to the
+victor. For all his fine speeches, I feel convinced that Montbar looks
+upon the ship as his own, and has only come to obtain her crew also to
+be henceforth under his command. But, should ransom be paid, Montbar
+would consider us freed from all obligation."
+
+That evening, therefore, Hartog stated plainly our conditions to
+Captain Montbar, which, shortly, were that if the treasure proved to be
+of great value, we would divide it equally among the companies of the
+frigate and our ship; if not of great value, then the whole of the
+treasure was to go to the frigate as salvage for our vessel; and if we
+did not succeed in bringing the treasure away, then our ship and her
+company were to be at Montbar's disposal, to do with as he thought fit.
+
+These proposals were received by Montbar with a gravity and shrewdness
+which clearly proved his professed generosity in returning us our
+vessel was only preliminary to demanding a ransom.
+
+"Let it be as you say, then," he said. "Within a week we shall have
+ascertained the value of this treasure, when the matter may be adjusted
+in the manner you propose. Meanwhile, the resources of my vessel are at
+your disposal."
+
+We thanked him and withdrew, but we determined only to employ our own
+men on our second visit to the eaves. A fair remuneration for the
+salvage of our ship was all that Captain Montbar looked for or
+expected, and we saw no reason why we should disclose our secret to any
+beyond those chosen from our own company, nor did Montbar seek to pry
+into our business, contenting himself with our promise, at the end of
+the week either to pay him salvage or surrender our ship and ourselves,
+to be disposed of in such manner as might please him best.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIV
+
+WE AGAIN EXPLORE THE CAVES
+
+
+During the two days which followed the making of our compact with
+Captain Montbar we were busy with our preparations for a second visit
+to the place of the painted hands, where we knew that gold was to be
+obtained for those who had the courage to carry it away. This time we
+sailed round, so that we were saved the journey over the cliffs. We had
+caused to be made for Hartog, Janstins, and me dresses of sail-cloth,
+with masks like those worn by Inquisitors, the eye-holes being filled
+with glass. The sleeves of the jacket were made long, so as to cover
+our hands. Our sea boots and breeches we knew to be impervious to
+hornet stings, and, thus equipped, we hoped to succeed in carrying away
+the treasure which the Lamakera fishermen had abandoned.
+
+We took the smallest of our ship's boats, in which we rowed ashore,
+and, leaving the crew at the entrance to the caves, we three, as
+silently as possible, propelled the boat along the stream into the
+interior. As we progressed we met with evidences of our former visit.
+Lumps of stalactites lay where they had fallen when shaken from the
+vaulted roof by the discharge of our firearms. The body of the lad
+Bruno was also to be seen, half submerged, in the water of the stream.
+Close to the body was the heap of gold dust, and this we began to load
+into our boat, making as little noise as possible lest we should
+disturb the hornets from their nests.
+
+We worked rapidly, and in less than an hour we had filled the boat with
+as much as she could carry of the heavy sand, nearly all of which was
+gold dust, when a humming warned us of the approach of the hornets. We
+had brought with us but a single torch, so as to avoid the light which
+we knew would attract the swarm of venomous insects, as also the bats
+and flying creatures which had made their home in these wonderful
+caverns; but the solitary gleam, in so much darkness, seemed to burn
+with the brightness of a conflagration. The smoke, also, from our
+torch, ascending into the vaulted roof of the cavern, was beginning to
+disturb the weird dwellers from their gloomy abode, and already
+ghostly, bat-like forms began to fill the air space above our heads. It
+was time to leave, and, reluctantly, we began to push the boat toward
+the mouth of the cave, promising ourselves to return next day for more
+of the precious stuff; of which there appeared to be an inexhaustible
+supply. As we neared the entrance to the cave, however, we were
+startled to observe a peril which had hitherto escaped our notice.
+Poised over the arch of the narrow passage was a mass of rock so finely
+balanced that it seemed to be held in its place by the weight of a
+number of bat-like creatures clustering at one of its angles. As we
+approached, these bats, startled by the light of our torch, began, one
+or two at a time, to rise from their resting place, causing the rock to
+topple toward us. Thus we stood in danger of being crushed by the mass
+should it fall as we passed the entrance, or, worse still, if it fell
+before we escaped into the cave beyond, we might find ourselves
+entombed alive in this dreadful place, to become a prey to the horrors
+of which we had had previous experience.
+
+"Forward!" roared Hartog, and, putting forth his great strength, he
+began to propel the boat, heavily laden as she was, at a rapid pace
+toward the entrance of the cavern. With our hearts in our throats,
+Janstins and I came to his assistance, and, pushing frantically
+together, we drove the boat through the entrance just as the bats, in a
+body, rose from the balancing rock, which, relieved of their weight,
+fell with a crash, effectually blocking the path into the cave.
+Fortunately we were on the right side of the obstacle, and our way was
+open to the sea, but a moment's hesitation would have consigned us to a
+lingering death, which, I am not ashamed to say, I shuddered to
+contemplate.
+
+We now took off the canvas jackets and masks we had worn as a
+protection against stings from the hornets, and, without further
+mishap, conveyed the sand we had brought away with us on board our
+ship, from which we washed six buckets full of gold dust. Each
+bucketful we reckoned, by weight, to be worth twenty thousand English
+pounds, so that we had ransom to pay Montbar for salvaging our vessel,
+besides retaining enough to make us all rich men.
+
+Our crew, who had now become obedient to Hartog's authority, were
+desirous to continue the search of the cavern, in the hope of obtaining
+more of the precious metal, but on being taken to the entrance to the
+caves, it was found that an impassable barrier of rock stood between
+them and their desire for boundless wealth. They were, therefore,
+compelled to be satisfied with a share in the gold we had already won.
+
+And here it may be observed how wise are the ways of Providence and how
+watchful appeared to be the good genius who followed our destiny. Had
+limitless wealth been suddenly showered upon us, what evil consequences
+might have followed? Man is, after all, but an avaricious creature, who
+requires the discipline of necessity to restrain his covetous nature.
+The prospect of gold-getting would probably have undermined Hartog's
+authority, and would most likely have ended in disaster for us all. As
+it was, we had enough, but not more than enough, and the discipline of
+our ship, so necessary to our common safety, was maintained.
+
+We paid Montbar, according to our agreement, gold to the value of sixty
+thousand English pounds, that being half the value of the gold
+obtained, with which he expressed himself well satisfied.
+
+"Honesty is, after all, the best policy," he said. "Had I not restored
+to you your ship I would have missed this treasure, that will well
+repay me for my long voyage, which I had before thought profitless. I
+regret your decision not to accompany me to the West Indies, but since
+you have paid your ransom you are free to go whithersoever your fancy
+may lead you, without let or hindrance."
+
+We thanked Montbar, although I could not help smiling at the tribute
+which he paid to honesty when I remembered that the lockers in his
+cabins were crammed with the loot which he had taken as a freebooter
+upon the seas.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXV
+
+I AM KIDNAPPED
+
+
+We were now of two minds, whether to continue the exploration of New
+Holland, or to shape a course for the islands of the South Seas; but
+Hartog finally decided for the islands, where there is always adventure
+and profit to be had. Besides, we were anxious to prove the truth, or
+otherwise, of the existence of the Islands of Engano, mentioned by
+Marco Polo in the account of his voyage round the world in the year
+1272, as the Male and Female Islands.
+
+The first group of islands we touched at after leaving the abandoned
+Spanish settlement at New Holland, appeared to be well wooded and
+fertile, and approaching one of the largest we cast anchor near the
+shore. On the following day we endeavoured to work to windward of this
+dangerous coast, but in spite of skilful seamanship it soon, became
+certain we were being drawn, probably by some strong current, closer to
+the land. The ship was so near to the rocks that escape appeared
+impossible. At three in the afternoon, however, the ship doubled the
+reefs, it may be said, almost by a miracle.
+
+This adventure set us thinking upon a record among the manuscripts we
+had brought with us of a remarkable phenomenon existing somewhere in
+these regions. In describing one of the larger islands the record says:
+"By the coast of this country, toward the north, is the sea called the
+Dead Sea, the water whereof runneth into the earth, and if anyone
+falleth into that water he is never found more. And if shipmen go but a
+little way into it they are carried rapidly downward, and never return
+again. And none knoweth whither they are carried, and many have thus
+passed away, and it hath never been known what became of them."
+
+We had hitherto given little credence to this report, but our recent
+experience proved the currents running between these islands to be
+strong and treacherous, and warned us to be on guard against them. The
+great distance we were from home, and the absence of any assistance to
+be looked for from men of our own race made it doubly necessary to
+consider every aspect of our voyage in order to escape the many perils
+which everywhere beset us.
+
+We now approached a coast running east and west to the horizon, so that
+we could not say whether we had come to an island or to another
+southern continent. The anxieties through which we had passed,
+particularly our narrow escape from shipwreck upon the reefs, made it
+desirable we should seek some haven in which to recruit our strength
+and re-victual our ship before setting out upon our homeward voyage,
+for Hartog was anxious to deposit the gold we had obtained from the
+place of the painted hands in safe keeping at Amsterdam. The carrying
+about of so much treasure on board the vessel was a risk he thought it
+imprudent to run, as the presence of gold on the ship would prove a
+constant temptation to the men to mutiny. Besides which, there was
+always the chance of capture by pirates or freebooters who, at this
+time, roamed the seas. General satisfaction was, therefore, expressed
+when Hartog announced his intention of returning to Amsterdam.
+
+On the morning of the next day after sighting the land along which we
+now coasted the look-out reported a sheltered bay, which promised us
+the haven we desired, and an hour later we cast anchor under the lee of
+a bold headland, near to a beach, which bordered what appeared to be a
+fertile and well-wooded country.
+
+We had barely found our moorings when five natives came in a canoe, the
+middle one vigorously baling the water out of the craft. As they drew
+nearer we observed that they were all women, one standing up at the
+prow, whose red hair came down to her waist. She was white as regards
+colour, beautifully shaped, the face aquiline and handsome, rather
+freckled and rosy, the eyes black and gracious, the forehead and
+eyebrows good, the nose, mouth, and lips well-proportioned, with the
+teeth well-ordered and white. Being rich in so many parts and graces
+she would be judged to be a very beautiful woman, and at first sight
+she stole away my heart. On arriving alongside she climbed aboard with
+amazing agility, and without the least sign of fear, from which I
+conjectured that Europeans were not unknown to her. As her eyes swept
+us her glance halted when it rested upon me, and, without
+embarrassment, she made signs for me to approach her.
+
+"Whence come ye?" she said, speaking in Spanish, though with an accent
+that sounded unfamiliar.
+
+"From the white man's country," I answered, "to seek adventure in this
+land."
+
+"Ye come far to seek little," she replied. "This land is desolate. None
+may live upon it. It is waterless."
+
+"Then we must look farther," I answered. "We are in search of water."
+
+"I can show you where water is," she continued, "if you will come with
+me."
+
+I hesitated, and Hartog, when he caught the drift of her invitation,
+bade me on no account trust myself alone with these savages.
+
+"Our boats will be lowered directly," I answered. "Then you may show us
+where to find fresh water, and we shall be grateful."
+
+"I cannot wait for your boats," she replied. "Come with me now if you
+are not afraid. Your boats can follow."
+
+It would have shamed me to confess fear to go with these women, and,
+not dreaming of treachery, I descended to the canoe, while Hartog and
+the others made ready to follow in the ship's boats. But I had no
+sooner set foot in the canoe than the four girls, who possessed the
+strength of young men, began to paddle vigorously toward a point which
+jutted out on the western side of the bay in which the "Golden
+Seahorse" lay at anchor. We soon rounded the point, when we lost sight
+of the ship. Thinking that all this was intended for a jest, I
+remonstrated with my beautiful captor, and called upon her to bid the
+girls cease rowing until my companions should come up with us; but at
+this she only laughed, and at a word from her the girls redoubled their
+exertions until the canoe seemed to fly over the surface of the water.
+We now approached a precipice, which rose sheer out of the sea, and, as
+we drew nearer, I observed a tunnel into which the water rushed with
+the force of a mill-race. It then came to my mind that this was the
+current I had read of which ran into the earth, and along which shipmen
+had been carried, never to be heard of again.
+
+I glanced at the woman who had kidnapped me in this strange fashion
+seemingly with the object of enticing me to my doom. Her face was set
+and stern; with both hands she grasped a steering paddle, with which
+she guided the canoe into the rushing stream. The girls had ceased
+rowing, and were crouched together in the frail craft, which now,
+caught by the hand of Nature, was carried with incredible speed into
+the darkness of the unknown.
+
+How long we were in the tunnel I cannot say. It seemed an eternity, but
+it could not actually have been very long. The speed at which we
+travelled was so great as to make the drawing of the breath difficult,
+and a strange humming sound--very loud-made it impossible to speak or
+even to cry out. I had abandoned hope and resigned myself to death when
+suddenly we emerged from the tunnel into a blinding sunshine, which
+dazzled the eyes after the darkness. Once more we had come to the open
+sea.
+
+The girls resumed their paddles, and now began to urge the canoe toward
+one of two islands visible on the horizon about thirty miles apart.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXVI
+
+THE MALE AND FEMALE ISLANDS
+
+
+I was now able to demand an explanation for the cause of my abduction,
+which I did with some warmth.
+
+"In what way have I offended," I asked of the woman who had enticed me
+on board the canoe, "that you should repay the trust I placed in you
+with treachery? We came among you as friends, desiring nothing so much
+as your goodwill. But you have treated me as an enemy, carried me away
+from my ship, and separated me from my friends Take, heed, I am a man,
+and have some strength. You are but women. Why, then, should I not
+overpower you and return the way I came?"
+
+"That is impossible," answered my captor. "None could make their way
+back through the tunnel against the stream."
+
+"At least, tell me then," I continued, "your name, for what purpose I
+am brought here, and whither you are taking me."
+
+"My name is Sylvia Cervantes," replied my captor, proudly. "As to why
+you are brought here, ask the wise-ones whom you shall presently see.
+Yonder islands are the Islands of Engano."
+
+In the surprise which her words occasioned I almost forgot the anger
+which had begun to burn within me when I thought of how basely I had
+been betrayed. Before me were the wonderful Male and Female Islands,
+fabled by Marco Polo. I had come upon this voyage with Dirk Hartog in
+quest of adventure. Well, here was an adventure awaiting me that was
+likely to prove the most remarkable I had yet encountered.
+
+As we drew near, to one of the islands, I was impressed by the extreme
+beauty of the scene. The cliffs rose to great heights, forming a dark,
+clear-cut line against the sky, while between the lofty walls, verdant
+valleys stretched down to the white, sandy beaches, upon which the
+waves broke in glistening spume. Toward a beach, somewhere about the
+centre of the island, our course was laid, and upon coming to the
+shallows, the girls shipped their paddles and sprang into the water,
+when, with others helping them, they ran the canoe on to the beach,
+making no more of my weight than if I had been a child.
+
+I now observed among the woods of the, very ancient stone buildings,
+which, at one time, must have been occupied by a people possessing a
+high state of civilization. They were in ruins, and overgrown by
+flowering shrubs and creepers, but were apparently still used as
+habitations for it was to one of these houses I was presently
+conducted. Here I was invited to rest and refresh myself with some
+delicious fruit that was set before me, the like of which I do not
+remember having tasted before.
+
+Sylvia Cervantes now joined me, and in the witchery of her presence I
+forgot my perilous plight, and gave myself up to the luxury and
+enjoyment of the moment.
+
+From Sylvia I learnt the history of my capture, and why she had come to
+entice me away with her.
+
+Having inquired my name, which I gave her, Sylvia continued as
+follows:--
+
+"You must know, then, Peter," she said, "that we are ruled here by
+custom which may not be changed. The wise-ones who live on the mountain
+tops tell us what to do, and we do it without question. The wise-ones
+are not as others are. They see what others cannot see, and they know
+many things that others cannot even guess at, so when the wise-ones
+told me your ship was on the other side of the Great Barren Island, and
+that I was to take my canoe and bring you here, I could not help but
+obey."
+
+"How is it possible," I asked, "that mortal eyes can see so far?"
+
+"The eyes of the wise-ones are not as mortal eyes," replied Sylvia,
+gravely. "Rest now, and to-morrow you shall hear what is required of
+you."
+
+I was so affected by the calamity which had overtaken me that I lacked
+the disposition to question Sylvia more closely on the matter. It was
+plain I was a captive, and helpless to avert my fate, whatever it might
+be. As well then accept the inevitable, and make the most of the
+passing hour. I did not value life, since Anna's death, at a pin's
+ransom. If, therefore, the end of all things for me in this world was
+at hand, let it come. I would welcome it without regret.
+
+Sylvia now told me as much as she knew about the island to which I had
+been brought, and of its people.
+
+In ages gone by, she said, when the stone houses were new, and a
+flourishing city stood in the valley, a disagreement had arisen
+between the king and queen, who held equal sway over the two islands,
+of such a nature that the breach became impossible to be healed.
+Instead of going to war with each other, and thus sacrificing the lives
+of many of their respective followers in battle, who had no part in
+their quarrel, an agreement was come to whereby the king withdrew
+himself to the western island, leaving the queen in undisputed
+possession in the east. The king took to him all the men in both
+islands, giving up to the queen the women, to become her subjects. Since
+then the Male and Female Islands had been managed as separate
+communities. There was no king or queen now, the people of both islands
+being ruled by the wise-ones, who lived on the mountain tops in the
+Female Island. But the inhabitants of the two islands still continued to
+live apart, the males on one island and the females on the other. On the
+Male Island the males dwelt alone, without their wives, or any other
+women. Every year, in the month of March, the men came to the Female
+Island, and tarried there three months, to wit, March, April, and May,
+dwelling with their wives for that space. At the end of those three
+months they returned to their own island, and pursued their avocation
+there, selling ambergris to the traders from Sumatra. As for the
+children whom their wives bore them, if they were girls they stayed with
+their mothers; but if they were boys their mothers brought them up until
+they were fourteen years old, and then sent them to their fathers. Those
+women who were married did nothing but nurse and rear their children.
+Their husbands provided them with all necessaries. Those who were
+unmarried, and until marriage, became Amazons, doing all the work on the
+island that would, in the ordinary course, be done by men. They were
+very strictly reared, and were as hardy as boys. If necessary they could
+fight in defence of their country with a courage equal to that displayed
+by the bravest warriors. Such were the strange customs of the people on
+these two islands as related to me by Sylvia Cervantes.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXVII
+
+A TASK IS SET ME
+
+
+On the day after I was made captive to the people on the Female Island
+in the Engano group, I was given an opportunity to observe the customs
+which prevail among these Amazons. They appeared to be a happy, healthy
+people, nor could I fail to notice the absence of ill-temper and
+discord, which may be observed in all communities in which men and
+women live together, and where jealousy between the sexes is too often
+the cause of lifelong feuds. Here the matrons seemed content to devote
+themselves to the rearing of their offspring, who, in return, rendered
+heart-whole affection to their mothers. I never witnessed such docility
+and loving obedience as was displayed by the children of this island to
+those who had the care of them, and while I remained at Engano I never
+heard a child cry or saw a woman in tears.
+
+As the girls reach maturity, which they do in these latitudes at the
+age of about twelve years, they are instructed by their mothers how to
+perform the necessary work, and become very skilful at throwing the
+lance, harpoon, or any manner of dart, being bred to it from their
+infancy. These girls, from this training, possess wonderful eyesight,
+and will descry a sail at sea farther than any sailor could see it.
+
+The dress adopted by the dwellers on the Female Island, though scanty
+to civilized eyes, is nevertheless suited to their manner of life. It
+consists of tapa cloth cut in a deep fringe depending from waist to
+knee. Their hair, which is long, hangs down their backs. Those who,
+like Sylvia, have red hair, are mostly freckled and rosy, which, so far
+from detracting from their beauty, rather adds to their charms. The
+dark-haired ones are burnt brown by the sun.
+
+I was now taken by Sylvia to be presented to the wise-ones, at whose
+instigation I had been brought to the island. These I found to be men,
+if indeed they could be called such, but they were so wizened in
+appearance as more to resemble monkeys. Their manner of life is so
+austere as to make it a matter for marvel that body and soul could
+cling together. They will not kill an animal for food, or for any other
+purpose, not even a fly or a flea, or anything in fact that has life;
+for they say they have all souls, and it would be a sin to kill them.
+They eat no vegetables in a green state, only such as are dry, for they
+believe that even green leaves have life. And they sleep on the bare
+ground, naked, without anything to cover them, or to soften the
+mountain rocks which form their bed. They fast every day, and drink
+nothing but water. Yet, in spite of the rigour of their discipline,
+they attain to extreme old age; not one of the wise men, so Sylvia
+informed me, being less than one hundred years old, while some were
+accredited with upwards of two centuries of life. By reason of their
+abstinence, they are supposed to be gifted with mysterious occult
+powers, notably second sight, by which they are able to locate
+strangers at a great distance from their own country, and to foretell
+their advent. Not long since they had foretold the coming to the island
+of a Spanish fleet, when the whole Amazon population had taken refuge
+in subterranean caves until the Spaniards had left, which they did
+under the belief that the island was deserted. It was by means of this
+second sight that the "Golden Seahorse" had been located, and that I
+had been selected from among the crew to carry out a project which the
+wise men had in view, and the particulars of which I was about to
+learn.
+
+The chief of the wise-ones, who acted as spokesman, now informed me of
+the reason I had been brought to the island.
+
+"You must know, Signor," said he, addressing me as though I was a
+Spaniard; an appellation which I felt inclined to resent, "that we are
+troubled by a demon we have found it impossible to slay. Many of our
+girls have fallen victims to the monster, while the men from the Male
+Island have repeatedly attacked it during the months of their residence
+here, without being able to overcome it. In length the creature is
+thirty feet, and of great bulk. It has two forelegs near the head,
+armed with claws. The head is very big, and the eyes stand out from it
+on knob-like excrescences. The mouth is big enough to swallow a man
+whole, and is armed with pointed teeth. In short, the monster is so
+fierce that all stand in fear at the sight of it. Now it is known that
+the men of your race are brave, and possess weapons of which we have no
+knowledge, so, when it was revealed to us that your ship was close by
+on the other side of the Great Barren Island, we resolved to bring you
+here; who seemed, in our eyes, to be a brave man, so that you may rid
+us of the demon which threatens our peace, if not our very existence."
+
+"Alas! oh, wise-one," I answered. "How much better to have brought the
+ship also! On board of her, it is true, we possess weapons against
+which even such a monster as you tell me of could not prevail. But
+these weapons I have not with me. How then can I, single-handed, hope
+to overcome so terrible a creature as you describe? Rather send me back
+to my ship, when I promise to bring her here, so that a party of us,
+well armed, may attack the demon, when no doubt we shall be able to
+destroy it." But at this the wise-one shook his head.
+
+"To bring the ship here," said he, "would be easy. But how do we know
+we could be rid of her without injury to our people?"
+
+"I would pass you my word as to that," I answered.
+
+"So you say now," replied the wise-one. "But how shall we know that you
+would keep your word?"
+
+An angry retort sprang to my lips, but I restrained myself on receiving
+a warning glance from Sylvia, which reminded me that I stood at the
+mercy of these monkey men.
+
+"Give me three days, then," I answered, "to devise some means for
+destroying the monster. If I succeed, I demand to be sent back to my
+ship. Without this promise I will do nothing for you, let the
+consequences to me be what they may."
+
+The wise-one seemed to ponder my words carefully.
+
+"Be it so, then," he answered. "If in three days you rid us of this
+demon I will see that you are restored to your friends. But if you
+should fail, and survive, you must nevertheless be put to death. We
+have no room on the Islands of Engano for strangers."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXVIII
+
+THE SLAYING OF THE GREAT CROCODILE
+
+
+I now bethought me of how I might best set about the task of
+vanquishing the monster which held the Female Island in terror, and
+which, from the description given me by the wise-ones, I judged to be a
+crocodile. Nor in this was I mistaken, for, being taken by Sylvia to a
+place of safety from which I could see the demon, I was confirmed in
+the opinion I had formed by what I saw, although I had never seen a
+crocodile of such amazing proportions before. It lived in a cave close
+to a fertile plain, where goats belonging to the islanders were
+pastured. Not far off was a stream at which it went to drink, and a
+deep furrow in the sand marked the road it made to the water. During
+the day it remained in its cave, but toward evening it would issue
+forth and attack the goats, three or four of which it would kill, and
+carry off to its lair. Those in charge of the goats dared not
+interfere, lest the monster, deprived of its accustomed food, might
+seek its dinner among the ruined stone houses in which the islanders
+lived.
+
+Now I noticed that the road along which the crocodile travelled to the
+water was very deeply furrowed, thus proving how the great lizard had
+repeatedly dragged its heavy bulk over the same spot on its way to
+drink at the stream, and I bethought me of a plan to deal with the
+reptile. The only weapon I had upon me when kidnapped from my ship was
+a short sabre or manchette, which I wore as a sidearm. But this I hoped
+would prove a formidable weapon when put to the use for which I now
+intended it.
+
+During the morning of the next day, when we knew that the crocodile
+would be asleep in his cave, Sylvia and I went together to the road
+which the reptile had made, by the weight of his body, to his usual
+watering-place.
+
+Here, with such rude implements as the islanders possessed, we dug a
+trench the width of the road, and for some distance along it. At the
+bottom of the trench we laid a stout log, in which was firmly fixed my
+manchette, its sharp point upward. We then filled up the trench with
+soft sand, and retired to the place of vantage which I had occupied the
+previous day, and from which we could see the crocodile make his
+evening raid. Towards sundown he came forth with a rush among the
+terrified goats, four of which he slew with a stroke from his powerful
+tail, after which he proceeded to drag their mangled carcases into his
+lair. We waited an hour, when, just before sundown, the reptile came
+forth again on his way to the water. We watched him with bated breath,
+and Sylvia, who now, for the first time, began to understand the trap I
+had set, could hardly contain her excitement. When the crocodile came
+to the sand-pit we had dug on the road he sank down, when the sharp
+blade of the manchette entered his breast, and as he dashed forward,
+rove him to the navel, so that he died on the spot in the greatest
+agony.
+
+Sylvia now summoned the islanders to see my work. They came from all
+parts, and raised so great a shout when they saw their enemy dead that
+the sound of it reached the wise-ones on the mountain-tops, who peered
+down at the beast where he lay in a morass of blood which deluged the
+sand so that it ran into the stream, dyeing the water a deep red.
+
+The death of the reptile, and the craft and cunning I had displayed in
+the killing of it, so impressed the Amazons that they came to me in a
+body, with Sylvia as their mouthpiece, asking me to stay and be their
+king, nor did the wise-ones raise any objection to this proposal. But
+although I admired Sylvia, I had no desire to spend the rest of my days
+at Engano, not even as King of the Amazons. I therefore answered that
+my comrades were no doubt looking for me, nor would they continue their
+voyage home until all hope of my rescue had been abandoned, and I
+reminded the wise-ones of the promise they had made me of safe conduct
+back to my vessel, in case I should succeed in ridding the island of
+their enemy. The justice of my claim was not to be denied, and with the
+dawn of the morrow the wise-ones undertook to ascertain the direction
+in which the ship lay and to send me aboard her.
+
+That evening a feast was held in my honour; some of the men from the
+Male Island came over, by special permission of the wise-ones, in order
+to be present, and to see the man who had slain the monster against
+which they had been unable to prevail.
+
+The men from the Male Island I found to be as free from ill-will toward
+one another as were the women on the Female Island. Since they had
+neither wife nor child, they associated in pairs, and mutually rendered
+each other all the services a master could reasonably expect from a
+servant, being together in so perfect a community that the survivor
+always succeeded his dead partner to any property he may have had.
+They behave to each other with the greatest justness and openness of
+heart. It is a crime to keep anything hidden. On the other hand, the
+least pilfering is unpardonable, and punished by death. And indeed
+there can be no great temptation to steal when it is reckoned a point
+of honour never to refuse a neighbour what he wants; and when there is
+so little property of value it is impossible there should be many
+disputes over it. If any happened, the wise-ones interposed, and soon
+put an end to the difference.
+
+In all my travels I never met with happier or more gently disposed
+persons than the people of the Male and Female Islands of Engano.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XXXIX
+
+I BECOME A VICTIM OF DOMESTIC INFELICITY
+
+
+Next morning the wise-ones, according to promise, informed me, by means
+of their power of second sight, that my ship was in the place where I
+had left her, which seemed probable, as it would no doubt be on land
+that Hartog and my friends would be looking for me.
+
+I passed my word to the wise-ones that Hartog's vessel would not visit
+the Engano Islands, since strangers were not welcome; and, having bid
+good-bye to the Amazons, I once more embarked with Sylvia in her canoe,
+and was paddled round the east end of the Great Barren Island, where,
+in the distance, was the "Golden Seahorse" still at anchor in the bay
+where I had last seen her.
+
+When I came aboard Hartog was overjoyed at my return. "I shall have to
+keep thee tied up, Peter," he said to me, in jest at my frequent
+mishaps. "You are for ever either falling overboard or running away."
+But when I told him of my adventure on Amazon Island he listened with
+great interest, expressing regret that I should have pledged my word
+against the ship's calling there. His disappointment, however, was
+modified when I told him that nothing of any commercial value was to be
+found upon either of the Engano Islands; nothing, in fact, being worthy
+of notice but the wonderful contentment of the inhabitants, a commodity
+which could not be carried away.
+
+"Let us up stick and home, then," answered Hartog merrily. So, having
+presented Sylvia and her accompanying Amazons with gifts, in return for
+which they showed us where excellent water was to be obtained with
+which we might replenish our tanks, we bade farewell to the Great
+Barren Island, and shaped a course for Holland.
+
+On our arrival at Amsterdam Hartog arranged for the disposal and
+division of our treasure. He and I, as joint promoters of the
+expedition, each took to the value of twenty thousand English pounds,
+giving the remainder to be divided among our officers and crew, who had
+never in their lives before looked to possess so much money. The ship
+was put out of commission, though, for the present, we determined not
+to sell her. Hartog promised himself a spell ashore, and I also looked
+forward to a life of ease and recreation. I was now a rich man, with
+more wealth to my credit than would satisfy my simple needs for the
+remainder of my life. Why then, I asked myself, should I seek further
+peril and adventure in unknown lands to gain money of which I already
+possessed more than I knew what to do with?
+
+I did not return to my estate, which had become distasteful to me,
+recalling, as it did, the brief span of nuptial happiness which I had
+enjoyed with Anna, and when, later, my father-in-law, the Count of
+Holstein, offered to buy it from me, I was glad to sell it to him. With
+a portion of my capital I now secured a full share in the business of
+De Decker, my old master, and, having purchased a fine house at
+Amsterdam, I resolved to settle down to the lucrative business of a
+merchant.
+
+Before taking possession of my new home I paid a visit to my family at
+Urk, where I found that my father had retired from the active
+management of his fishing business, which was now carried on by my
+eldest brother, who was married, and blessed with three sturdy boys. My
+two younger brothers were also married, and both had begun to rear
+families.
+
+"Only you, Peter," said my mother, "my favourite son, the flower of the
+flock, are alone and childless."
+
+I had not, since Anna's death, given a thought to marrying again, but
+my mother's words appealed to me with some force when I reflected that
+I owed it to my country not to lead a life of selfish celibacy. I would
+never love with the strength of my first love which I had given to
+Anna; but there seemed to be no reason why I should not become the head
+of a house, and the father of a family, so that I might live again in
+my children.
+
+Now, it so fell out that Pauline Rutter, a niece of De Decker, came at
+this time to stay with her uncle at Amsterdam, and as I was a frequent
+visitor at De Decker's house, I often met her. Pauline was proud, dark,
+and self-willed--the very opposite of what Anna Holstein had been when
+I married her, and for this reason, perhaps, I liked her the more,
+since it put an end to all comparison between her and Anna, to whom I
+had given my first love.
+
+Pauline was flattered by the attention I paid her, and when at length I
+asked her to become my wife she made no secret of her satisfaction at
+the prospect of becoming Madam Van Bu.
+
+"I have always thought, sir," she said, "that you would marry again. It
+is a duty which you owe to your wealth and position. That your choice
+should have fallen upon me is an honour of which I am very sensible."
+
+It will thus be seen that in the alliance which Pauline and I proposed
+there was to be no love-making. The bargain was one that might have
+been made in the course of De Decker's business. I was to give Pauline
+my wealth and name, in return for which she promised to become my wife,
+and to undertake the management of my household. It was a shameful
+bargain, and I was well served for my part in it.
+
+We had not been married a month before each of us began to observe in
+the other an incompatibility of temper which made any kind of agreement
+between us, even on the most trivial matters, impossible. Pauline
+declared that I brought the manners of the forecastle into her
+drawing-room, while the social inanities to which she devoted most of
+her time angered me into upbraiding her with her frivolity and lack of
+common sense. These mutual recriminations soon led us into a condition
+of life which destroyed all prospect of peace and contentment in our
+home. Neither would give way one jot. The more Pauline stormed at me
+for my boorishness and want of consideration for her the more obstinate
+did I become in ascribing to her frivolous nature the true cause of our
+unhappiness. I admired Pauline, and I looked to her to become the
+mother of my children; but we could neither of us endure the other's
+presence for any length of time without a squabble, so that our
+domestic infelicity became a jest and a byword even among our servants.
+In these circumstances I felt it would be better that we should part.
+It is said that absence makes the heart grow fonder, and I was
+convinced that I would regard Pauline with more kindly feelings if seas
+between us rolled than were possible if we remained together in the
+same house, and I have no doubt that Pauline thoroughly reciprocated my
+sentiments.
+
+In this mood I sought my old comrade Dirk Hartog. I found him, as I
+expected, at a tavern which he frequented. He was seated at a table
+with Bantum and Janstins, poring over a chart in which all three
+appeared to be deeply interested.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XL
+
+THE YELLOW PARCHMENT
+
+
+"Welcome, Peter!" cried Hartog, when he saw me. "I'd have wagered you'd
+be with us, and here you are in the nick of time."
+
+"What's in the wind now?" I asked, as I drew a chair to the table at
+which the three were seated.
+
+"The greatest and best chance that was ever offered to seafarers,"
+answered Hartog. "Read that, and say whether any man with the blood of
+a rover in him could sit tamely at home when such a country as this is
+waiting to be explored."
+
+With these words he pushed toward me a parchment yellow with age, but
+very clearly written, so it was easy to decipher. The paper, a
+translation in Spanish from some ancient tongue, read as follows:
+
+"The Ruby Mountains. Among these mountains there are certain great and
+deep valleys to the bottom of which there is no access. These valleys
+are full of rubies. Wherefore the men who go in search of them take
+with them a piece of flesh as lean as they can get, and this they east
+into the bottom of the valley. Now there are a number of white eagles
+that haunt these mountains and feed upon the serpents in which the
+valley abounds. When the eagles see the meat thrown down, they pounce
+upon it, and carry it up to some rocky hill-top, where they begin to
+rend it. But there are men on the watch, and as soon as they see that
+the eagles have, settled they raise a loud shouting to drive them off.
+And when the eagles are thus scared away, the men recover the pieces of
+meat, and find them full of rubies, which have stuck to the meat down
+in the bottom of the valley. The abundance of rubies in these depths is
+astonishing, but none can get down, and if any could they would be
+devoured by the serpents which abound there. This country is inhabited
+by pygmies and giants. The giants, who are by far the largest men to be
+seen in this strait, are ruled by the pygmies."
+
+"And who is the author of this fairy tale?" I asked.
+
+"One to whom I take my hat off," answered Hartog. "Marco Polo, the
+first and greatest navigator in the world's history. Where he could go
+we can follow."
+
+"And where does he place the Ruby Mountains?" I inquired.
+
+"That is what troubles me," replied Hartog. "Marco Polo knew the Great
+South Land, but not so thoroughly as we are beginning to know it now.
+From this chart I place the Ruby Mountains on the north-west coast of
+the continent of New Holland."
+
+"Whose chart is it?" I inquired.
+
+"Marco Polo's own," said Hartog. "It was given to me by a man I once
+befriended, together with the parchment you have just read. How he came
+by it I need not say. The man is dead, and I trust his sins are
+forgiven him. But I know he would not lie to me, not willingly."
+
+"It seems a wild goose chase," I said, although my doubts were rapidly
+dissolving under the witchery of Hartog's sanguine temperament.
+
+"So did our last voyage," answered Hartog. "Yet every word that was
+written upon the paper that guided us was true. And why should we
+presume that men would give so much labour to preparing these charts
+and manuscripts in order to perpetuate lies?"
+
+I could not but admit this. The ability to make these drawings, and to
+inscribe these manuscripts, I knew was confined to a very few, who were
+mostly men of truth and honour. Such accounts as were available of the
+wonderful voyages of Marco Polo I had read with avidity, and I saw no
+reason to doubt the assertions of this brave and learned man.
+
+"What do you propose, then?" I asked Hartog, although in my own mind, I
+knew the old sea-dog was impatient to be off on a new treasure-hunt.
+
+"What else can I do, Peter?" replied Hartog, "than take ship for this
+place? I could never rest content, nor would you either, with the
+thought of these Ruby Mountains still unexplored."
+
+"You have settled the matter, then, so far as I am concerned," I said,
+with a laugh.
+
+"And why not, partner?" answered Hartog. "We own a fine ship that was
+surely never intended only to make a maiden voyage. We could visit this
+place, and be back in twelve months--two years at most. What is to keep
+us, then, from our pleasure trip?"
+
+Before Hartog had done speaking, I knew my mind was made up to go with
+him. My life at home with Pauline had become intolerable, nor did I
+take any active part in De Decker's business, finding the drudgery of
+the counting-house irksome after my more exciting experiences on sea
+and land, so, without further ado, I expressed to Hartog my willingness
+to join him in a fresh adventure to the South.
+
+Hartog was overjoyed at my decision.
+
+"I made no doubt you would come with me, Peter," he said. "We have been
+shipmates too long to sail our separate ways alone. With Bantum and
+Janstins, who are willing to sign on, and a picked crew; we can explore
+the Ruby Mountains and be back within the year."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLI
+
+THE RUBY MOUNTAINS
+
+
+On our second voyage to the South in the "Golden Seahorse" we followed
+the route we had originally taken with the "Endraght", avoiding as far
+as possible the calms and currents which had then impeded our progress,
+as also those islands where we had met with a hostile reception. It
+became necessary, however, to call at some of the groups we passed, and
+it surprised us to find how diversified are the manners and customs of
+the natives who inhabit the numerous islands of the South Seas. Not
+only are the people of each group governed by different laws, but
+frequently each island is distinct from the others in the language
+spoken and the manner of life followed upon it. Hence it would require
+a bulky volume to describe in detail the many and varied tribes we met
+with on our journey.
+
+We made the coast of New Holland within five months after leaving
+Amsterdam (a record voyage), somewhere about the same place where I had
+affixed the metal plate at the time of our first visit. But we did not
+land here, as the weather was unfavourable, a strong breeze blowing and
+a high sea running at the time, making it necessary to keep a good
+offing from the shore. As we coasted toward the south, however, the
+weather moderated, so that we were able to bring our ship with safety
+nearer land.
+
+From an observation we took when the weather was favourable, we
+ascertained that we were three hundred miles to the north, with an
+unbroken coastline extending before us; so we concluded we had rounded
+a promontory, and were now upon the west coast of New Holland. This
+encouraged us in the belief that we were following the right course to
+the Ruby Mountains, for Marco Polo's parchment informed us that the
+giants whom he saw were by far the largest men to be seen "in this
+strait," from which it seemed the intrepid Venetian navigator had
+sailed through this strait as early as the year 1272, when he made his
+famous voyage round the world.
+
+As we proceeded along the coast, the weather being now clear and fine,
+we observed great stretches of country, flat and uninviting, upon which
+there appeared to be no sign of life. Indeed, the whole of this
+southern continent seems to be sparsely populated when compared with
+the islands, upon most of which the native inhabitants are very
+numerous. In this may be seen the hand of an all-wise Providence. In
+the ages to come a white population will, no doubt, emigrate to New
+Holland, and if this great continent was found to be densely populated
+by a black people, it would be a work of great difficulty to overcome
+them. Whereas, the aboriginal population being scant by reason of the
+barren nature of the country, the task of colonization by the whites
+would be easy. We often sailed for more than a week at a time along
+this coast without seeing any sign of human habitation, and those
+natives whom we did see were of so poor a description and appeared to
+be so frightened of us and of our vessel as hardly to deserve the name
+of humans.
+
+And now we approached some cliffs, beyond which appeared a lofty range,
+which, from our present position, and the bearings given on Marco
+Polo's chart, Hartog declared to be the Ruby Mountains.
+
+As we approached the cliffs, a bold headland, which stood between us
+and a view of the coast beyond, assumed the appearance of a lion's
+head. The resemblance was so striking that it appeared as if the mighty
+hand of Nature had hewn a colossus from the living rock in the shape of
+a lion to guard the entrance into this land.
+
+Upon rounding this remarkable promontory, we found ourselves opposite a
+beach bordered by a broad line of surf, which indicated that the water
+here was very shallow for some distance from the shore. Both the surf
+and the beach seemed to be alive with black children, so diminutive
+were the forms who disported themselves in the breakers, or ran up and
+down upon the sand with the eagerness and agility generally displayed
+by boys at the seaside. As to the real ages of these people, however,
+we were not left long in doubt. Four canoes put off from the shore and
+came alongside. They were manned by twenty-five blacks, who,
+notwithstanding their small stature, we could see at a glance were
+full-grown men. We made signs to them to come aboard, but they were
+evidently in doubt whether or not to accept our invitation. We then
+threw out to them some small pieces of iron and strings of beads, at
+which they showed great satisfaction. These little men appeared to be
+an intelligent race. Their bodies were small, but their heads, in
+proportion, were large. They wore no beards, but their hair was curly
+like the Kafirs, some of them wearing it tied to the neck in a knot,
+and others letting it fall loose down to the waist. All of them had
+holes through their noses to carry fish bones, polished white. Some
+wore strings of human teeth round their necks.
+
+At length, five, bolder than the rest, ventured aboard. They did not
+appear to be afraid, and what astonished us most was that they seemed
+ready to take charge of us. They made signs that we should go ashore,
+and one of them, who appeared to be a chief, attempted to drive
+Janstins into the sea by hitting him with a kind of hammer with a
+wooden handle, and at one end a black conch shell. Janstins laughingly
+disarmed his small antagonist, which seemed to surprise him as well as
+the others, and brought them together in consultation.
+
+Ten of the pygmies now came aboard, to whom we gave nutmegs and cloves,
+thinking to please them. They took what we gave them, although they
+appeared surprised that we should offer them anything. The little
+chief, not more than three feet high, who had so amusingly attempted to
+drive Janstins into the sea, again made signs to us to go ashore. So
+Hartog ordered the pinnace to be manned, and armed against treachery.
+But we had not come within musket shot of the beach when the water
+became so shallow that we could not take the boat any farther,
+whereupon a number of us stepped out into the shallows, up to our
+waists in mud and kelp, and with some difficulty made our way to the
+beach, where the pygmies mustered in great force.
+
+On the beach we noticed fresh human footprints that must have been made
+by men of great stature. They were twice as long as the footprints we
+made, and none of us were noted for small feet. On going a short
+distance into the woods we saw a vast number of huts made of dried
+grass, so cramped that a man of ordinary size could not creep into them
+on all fours, yet many of them contained families of pygmies. We
+afterwards tried to penetrate somewhat farther into the wood, in order
+to ascertain the nature and situation of the country, when, on coming
+to an open place, a number of tall savages, none of them less than
+eight feet high; came out from the brushwood as though to attack us. On
+the neck of each giant sat one of the pygmies, who directed him in the
+same way that a man would guide a charger. The pygmies then began to
+let fly their arrows at us with great fury, by which Janstins was
+wounded, and one of the men hit in the leg. We were all hard pressed,
+so I ordered a volley to be fired, which killed one of the giants, so
+that the others dragged the dead man into the wood, from which all
+quickly disappeared. Being so far from the beach, and having a very
+difficult path to travel, we determined to return to the ship and
+report to Hartog what had occurred.
+
+Hartog, upon learning what had befallen us, resolved to make no further
+overtures of peace to these treacherous natives, who appeared to be
+more like wild beasts than men, and who, by their conduct, had placed
+themselves beyond all claim to consideration. It seemed that the
+pygmies possessed a greater intelligence than the giants, whom they
+used as ordinary men would use horses or beasts of burden. It was for
+this reason that the little chief had attempted to drive Janstins into
+the sea with his conch-shell hammer, regarding him as some smaller
+species of giant whom he could easily frighten into obeying him.
+
+During the afternoon some canoes came off in which were a number of
+pygmies, but they made no attempt to come aboard of us, remaining, as
+they thought, at a safe distance from the ship. In order to convince
+them of the error of this, however, and to punish them for their
+treachery of the morning, Hartog ordered our brass bow-chaser to be
+loaded with grape, and fired amongst them, which caused great
+consternation, and sent them back to their woods howling in terror,
+taking their dead and wounded with them.
+
+Hartog was determined to explore the range of mountains which we could
+see not far distant from the coast, in order to ascertain the truth, or
+otherwise, of the existence of rubies in the valleys as set forth in
+Marco Polo's account of this country. Although we had carefully looked
+for these gems among the ornaments worn by the pygmies, we had not seen
+any, from which we concluded that the men spoken of by Polo as having
+procured the rubies must have been of a different race, or possibly his
+own sailors. Toward evening we observed a large bird in the sky, which
+Hartog, with the aid of his spy-glass, pronounced to be a white eagle.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLII
+
+THE VALLEY OF SERPENTS
+
+
+We now equipped an expedition to explore the Ruby Mountains, of which I
+was appointed leader. Hartog wished to come with us, but I persuaded
+him that his place was on board our ship, which, remembering how the
+Spaniards had, on a former occasion, pirated the vessel, he could not
+deny.
+
+"You are right, Peter," he said, when we had argued the matter. "We
+cannot both go, and, since I am captain of the 'Golden Seahorse', I
+clearly perceive my duty is to stand by her through fair and foul."
+
+The matter being thus concluded, I took command of the party for the
+shore. In the forenoon we rowed for the beach in two pinnaces, well
+manned and armed. In all the places where we had landed we had treated
+the blacks with kindness, offering them pieces of iron, strings of
+beads, and pieces of cloth, hoping by these means to win their
+friendship, and to be allowed to explore the country; but, in spite of
+our friendly overtures, the blacks received us everywhere as enemies,
+and nowhere more so than in this land of pygmies and giants. We
+therefore determined to waste no more time in making useless efforts
+for peace, but to meet force with force. Twelve men, well armed, we
+considered to be a match for all the savages we were likely to
+encounter during a day's march inland.
+
+We had brought with us some coils of stout rope in order to assist us
+in descending from the mountain heights into the valleys below, for I
+did not place much reliance upon the fable of the eagles and the pieces
+of fresh meat as a means to procure the rubies which it was said were
+washed down by torrential rains at certain seasons. If rubies were to
+be obtained, I argued, it must be by a more practical method than that
+employed by Marco Polo's men. Besides, we had no fresh meat with which
+to give Polo's experiment a trial.
+
+After our recent brush with the natives these wild men gave us a wide
+berth, and we saw no sign of them on our way to the mountains, to which
+we came after two hours of walking. The sides of these mountains are
+rocky, with no verdure of any kind upon them except a species of
+stubble which grows in patches. When we came to the top of one of these
+hills, we looked down a sheer cliff into the valley. I never before saw
+any place so inaccessible to man. Nothing without wings, it appeared,
+could descend into those depths. After exploring the mountains for the
+best part of an hour, however, we came to a position where it was
+possible, with caution, to descend for some distance, and by aid of our
+rope, one end of which we fastened to rocks or stubble as opportunity
+offered, we succeeded in reaching a cliff from which there was a drop
+of not more than two hundred feet. This I calculated to be the entire
+length of the rope we had brought with us, by which I resolved to be
+lowered. Bantum tried to dissuade me from my project, urging that the
+risk was too great; but I was determined that, having come so far, I
+would not go back without being able to make some report of the valley
+we had undertaken to explore, and a descent by means of the rope seemed
+to be the only method, nor could Bantum suggest any other.
+
+I now knotted at one end of the rope a cradle in which I could sit.
+while being lowered, and so long as the rope held, of which there
+appeared to be no reason to doubt, for my weight was well within its
+compass, I did not anticipate danger.
+
+All being made ready, and every possible precaution taken against
+accident, I was let down from the top of the cliff to what looked like
+the dried-up course of a stream composed of pebbles and wash-dirt. The
+whole valley presented the most dreary and desolate appearance. The
+high cliffs by which it was surrounded rose like perpendicular walls,
+casting deep shadows, so that the sun's rays never penetrated to the
+floor, for which reason it was destitute of verdure, barren to the eye,
+and depressing to the senses. As I descended it seemed to me as though
+I was being lowered into some forgotten tomb.
+
+At length my feet touched ground, and, extricating myself from my
+cradle, I began to explore the course of the stream. The light in these
+depths, although it was noonday, was not greater than twilight, and I
+found some difficulty in ascertaining of what the bed of the stream was
+composed, but by crawling on all fours I was able to form some idea of
+its composition, and among the wash-dirt I found a number of dark
+stones, which, from the experience I had gained at Amsterdam, I knew to
+be rubies of a size and weight that promised great value.
+
+I now became so absorbed in my hunt for rubies that the dismal nature
+of my surroundings was forgotten. The greed of gain obsessed me, and as
+I gathered the precious stones into my pocket I would not have
+exchanged this desolate valley for the most beautiful spot on earth.
+
+But I was soon to learn how the wealth of the world is for ever
+encompassed by dangers that we wot not of. A shout drew my attention,
+and on looking up a sight met my gaze which drove all thoughts of
+ruby-hunting from my mind, and made self-preservation my only concern.
+The rope by which I had descended, relieved of my weight, swayed like
+a serpent endowed with life, and for this reason, perhaps, it was being
+fiercely attacked, about midway from the top, by a flock of white
+eagles which tore at the hemp with beak and claws. I ran to the cradle;
+but I had barely come to it when the rope parted, a hundred feet or
+more of it falling down to where I stood scarcely able, as yet, to
+realize the extent of the disaster which had overtaken me. A return to
+the ship for a fresh rope would occupy, I knew, six hours at the least,
+provided my companions were not molested on their way by hostile
+savages, and I shuddered to think what my sufferings must be during
+such a period of enforced solitude in this dreadful place. I shouted to
+my comrades on top of the cliff, who answered me, but it was impossible
+to understand what was said. I noticed, however, that some had already
+set off on a return to the ship, as I conjectured, for a fresh rope;
+while others continued to watch me. Thus I did not feel so deserted as
+I would otherwise have done, though I dreaded the weary hours before
+me, particularly when it should become dark, as would happen sooner
+here than above.
+
+And now, to add to my terrors, I became aware of a low, hissing sound
+which seemed to come from all around me, first from one quarter and
+then from another. The air seemed to menace me with the hisses that
+were borne upon it. Then, in spite of the gloom, by straining my eyes I
+could see the cause of this hissing. A number of serpents were crawling
+out of the crevices of the rocks around, and making toward me. I
+shouted in the hope of frightening them away, but, although they
+paused, irresolute, at the sound of my voice, they came on again,
+drawing closer every minute. They were of all sizes, some of great
+length, black and venomous-looking. One monstrous reptile of the
+constrictor species continued to watch me from an adjacent rock upon
+which it lay, its forked tongue darting in and out of its mouth. I felt
+that my reason was leaving me. Endurance has its limits--I could bear
+no more. Death or madness awaited me.
+
+Then a miracle happened. The white eagles, the cause of my mishap, now
+proved my salvation. They descended upon the serpents like bolts from
+above, carrying them off in their talons to the mountain tops, there to
+be devoured at their leisure. The dark valley became alive with
+flapping white wings and squirming serpents, in the midst of which
+pandemonium I mercifully lost consciousness.
+
+When I came to myself Hartog was beside me. It was pitch dark, but he
+carried a ship's lantern in his hand.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLIII
+
+WE AGAIN LEAVE NEW HOLLAND
+
+
+"Courage, comrade," said Hartog, who held a flask of spirits to my
+lips, and at the sound of his familiar voice life returned to me. I was
+so weak, however, and the shock to my nervous system had been so great,
+that I could not speak. I pressed his hand to let him know how thankful
+I was that he had come himself to my assistance. None, I firmly
+believe, but Hartog could have saved me at that moment from madness or
+death. With the tenderness of his great heart, which could be gentle as
+a woman's upon occasions, he lifted me in his arms, and bore me to the
+cradle at the end of the rope by which he had descended. I was soon
+drawn to the top of the cliff, where my companions awaited me, and
+presently Hartog himself joined us. We did not fear the pygmies and
+giants at night-time, for the dread of evil spirits in the dark is
+universal among the aborigines of New Holland, making it unlikely they
+would attack us, but it was a melancholy procession which made its way
+through the woods to the beach where our boats lay, with me carried on
+a stretcher by willing hands, since I was incapable of making any
+exertion.
+
+Next day, after a night of delirium, during which I raved, so Hartog
+told me, of eagles and serpents, I awoke refreshed, though still very
+weak. I could not bear to be left alone, not even for a moment, and
+Hartog nursed me with a tenderness that my mother would have given me
+had she been at my bedside. At length I pulled through, and was able to
+come on deck; but it was a shadow of my former self who crept up the
+companion ladder to where a couch had been prepared for me. As I lay
+thus, recovering my strength in the sun, I was able to give Hartog some
+account of my adventure. At first, when I spoke of rubies, he evidently
+regarded what I said as a flight of fancy inseparable from the dreadful
+ordeal through which I had passed. But when I insisted that I had told
+him nothing but truth, he brought me the clothes I had worn on my
+descent into the valley, the pockets of which we found to be full of
+the rubies I had collected. But, after consultation, we determined to
+say nothing about these rubies to any member of the crew. The wealth of
+the Indies would not have tempted me to descend into the valley again,
+and Hartog considered the risk too great for him to run, upon whom the
+safety of us all depended. To have asked others to undertake a danger
+from which we shrank would have been to undermine our authority and sow
+the seeds of mutiny. Thus we kept our secret, and after a further
+week's rest, during which I fully regained my strength, we made sail
+for the open sea.
+
+The land which we had up to now skirted and touched at was not only
+barren and inhabited by savages, but also the sea in these parts seemed
+to yield nothing but sharks, swordfish, and the like unnatural
+monsters, while the birds also were as wild and shy as the men. What
+pleasure the wretched inhabitants of this country can find in their
+lives it is hard to understand.
+
+We were now once more in need of water, and having sighted an island,
+we made for it, but could find no means to get near the land, owing to
+the heavy surf. We found the coast very precipitous, without any
+foreland or inlets. In short, it seemed to us a barren, accursed place,
+without leaf or grass. The coast here was steep, consisting of red
+rocks of the same height almost everywhere, and impossible to touch at
+owing to the breakers.
+
+During the whole of the next day the current carried us northward
+against our will, since we were running with small sail, and had but
+little control over the rudder. In the afternoon we saw smoke rising up
+from the shore, when I took charge of a boat's crew, in order to effect
+a landing, with our spirits somewhat revived, for I concluded if there
+were men on the island there must be water also.
+
+Coming near to the shore, we found it to be a steeply-rising coast,
+full of rocks and stones, with a violent surf running. Nevertheless,
+two of our men swam ashore, and succeeded in drawing the pinnace close
+to the reef, upon which we landed.
+
+We now began our search for water, without, however, finding any, when
+we observed coming toward us, from the direction in which we had seen
+the smoke, three men creeping on all fours. Their appearance was so
+wretched that we began to doubt if they were humans. They made no
+sound, apparently being incapable of speech, but they signed to us with
+beckoning fingers to approach them. Then they raised themselves upon
+their knees, and stretched out their hands to us in mute appeal. They
+were white men--some of the Spaniards marooned by Captain Montbar as a
+punishment for having stolen our vessel. And, with a shock, I
+recognized among them Pedro de Castro, the traitor to whom we owed the
+piracy of our ship.
+
+When we came close to the unfortunate Spaniards whom Montbar had left
+to shift for themselves on this desolate shore I bent over to examine
+them. But that they moved I would not have thought them to be alive.
+The pupils of their eyes were strangely dilated, and there were black
+circles under their eyes. Their hollow cheeks were deeply wrinkled.
+Their lips glued to their yellow teeth. They exhaled an infectious
+odour, and might well have been taken for dead men come forth from the
+tombs.
+
+We had some salt junk and biscuits on the boat, kept in one of the
+lockers against, as sometimes happened, the boat being unable to return
+to the ship in time for meals, and I sent one of the crew to fetch a
+portion, which he set before the famished men.
+
+When the Spaniards saw the food their limbs were affected with a
+shivering, and tears came into their eyes. Then they fell upon it, and
+devoured it with sobs of joy. In astonishment and pity we watched them
+at their wolfish meal. When they had finished I asked de Castro for
+some account of what had befallen them.
+
+The devil Montbar, he said, had abandoned them upon this desolate
+island, telling them to make shift for themselves, and to learn from
+the hardship of their lot repentance for the act of piracy they had
+committed in stealing our ship. On searching the island they found it
+to contain no water except a brackish liquid, to be had by digging, The
+only food obtainable was shell-fish, and occasionally the rank flesh of
+sea birds. They had neither the tools nor materials to build
+habitations, and were forced to shelter themselves from the scorching
+sun in summer and from the bitter cold in winter with a few bushes.
+When de Castro spoke of Montbar he became livid, and a very evil light
+shone in his eyes. For two years they had endured upon this island
+untold suffering. All the women and children were long since dead,
+except Donna Isabel Barreto, who clung to life with the tenacity born
+of a desire for revenge. Of the two hundred and forty Spaniards
+marooned by Captain Montbar but thirty now survived, the rest having
+perished miserably from starvation and exposure, when their bodies had
+been cast from the cliffs into the sea.
+
+When Pedro and his companions had somewhat recovered they led us to
+where their wretched settlement had been made among a clump of gaunt,
+wind-swept trees, and, in pity for their forlorn condition, I ordered
+all the provisions we had in the boat to be brought for their
+refreshment. Donna Isabel threw herself at my feet, clasping my knees,
+and covering my hands with kisses. She had lost all trace of the proud
+beauty she had formerly possessed. Her skin had been burnt almost black
+by the sun, and a mane of tangled white hair surrounded what had once
+been a noble countenance. Only her eyes retained their brightness, and
+at thought of rescue, and possible revenge upon her enemy Montbar, they
+seemed to glow with unnatural fire.
+
+I knew that Hartog would not have wished me to leave these wretched
+outcasts to their fate, however little deserving they may have been of
+our sympathy, so I invited them to accompany us back to the ship. They
+came protesting they would henceforth be our slaves, ready, in all
+things, to obey our slightest behest. But I had little faith in their
+promises when their necessities should be relieved.
+
+Hartog, as may well be imagined, was considerably surprised when we
+returned on board with the remnant of the Spanish settlement in such
+sorry plight, but he approved of what I had done in bringing them off
+the island. They were sent forward, where they received every
+attention. Donna Isabel was the only one allowed to berth in the cabin.
+We had no women's dress on board, but we found her warm clothing, in
+which she appeared as a man. After a while she recovered her good
+looks, and we found her companionship agreeable.
+
+A week later we came to an island which promised more favourable
+conditions than the one we had just left, and where we obtained a
+supply of good water for our tanks.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLIV
+
+THE ISLANDS OF ARMENIO
+
+
+It was now brought home to me that Donna Isabel Barreto was henceforth
+to play no unimportant part in the prosecution of our voyage. She had
+recovered her good looks, and although she was older than any of us on
+board the "Golden Seahorse", and probably ten years older than Hartog,
+she nevertheless exerted an influence over the captain which I could
+see he found it impossible to resist. Donna Isabel had once more
+resumed her feminine attire, having stitched together for herself a
+wardrobe from the ship's stores of cloth and calico, and Hartog begged
+from me three of the rubies which I had found in the Valley of
+Serpents, which he presented to her, and which she wore sewn on to a
+black velvet cap.
+
+Donna Isabel openly expressed her desire to amass treasure in order to
+follow up Montbar and take her revenge upon him for having marooned her
+and her people upon a desert island. This desire for revenge obsessed
+her. Her Spanish blood burned to repay the insults and indignities
+which Montbar had heaped upon her, and she looked forward with pleasure
+to the tortures which she promised herself she would inflict upon
+Montbar when once she held him in her power.
+
+In order to obtain means to make war upon her enemy, Donna Isabel
+persuaded Hartog to embark upon a fresh adventure, which promised to
+provide the necessary funds to equip a frigate equal to that owned by
+Montbar, so that she might engage him upon equal terms.
+
+The story that Donna Isabel had to tell was one confided to her by her
+late husband, Captain Barreto, which she had kept locked in her memory
+ever since, waiting for some such opportunity as the present, when the
+information she possessed might be turned to account. The story was,
+briefly, as follows:
+
+A long time ago a Spanish vessel sailed from Manila for Mexico, and
+east of Japan had by a violent storm been driven toward a small but
+high-rising island.
+
+When the crew went ashore, the island proved to be a country, strange
+and unknown to anyone; the people being of handsome stature, white
+skinned, and of good proportions, very affable, and amiably disposed.
+On their arrival in Mexico, the sailors related many marvels about the
+wealth of this island, giving their hearers to understand that, so to
+say, gold and silver were almost to be picked up at discretion on the
+shore, while the kettles and other cooking utensils of the natives were
+made of these metals. These islands were named the Islands of Armenio,
+after an Armenian merchant who was on board the ship. Donna Isabel
+professed to have received from her late husband the true bearings of
+these islands, which she confided to Hartog, and a course was set
+accordingly.
+
+Pedro de Castro, Donna Isabel's son, had now been forgiven his
+treachery toward us in stealing our vessel, since Hartog considered his
+punishment in having been marooned upon a desert island commensurate
+with his offence. He was, therefore, permitted to join us in the cabin,
+and was given employment as ship's purser, for which he was well
+suited. He expressed great contrition for what he had done, and I
+honestly believe at the time he intended to serve us faithfully. But
+treachery once practised is oft-times repeated, so I made up my mind to
+keep a watchful eye on Pedro de Castro lest we again be caught
+tripping.
+
+We now proceeded northward, coasting with great care a succession of
+small rocky islands that appeared to be uninhabited. As we proceeded,
+the weather became rough and tempestuous, the sea running so high that
+it sometimes threatened to engulf us. During the whole of our voyage we
+had not met with such a mountainous sea.
+
+At last we perceived a land to the north, trending to the north-east,
+of which the coast seemed to be one continuous rock, remarkably level
+at the top, and of a reddish colour, against which the sea broke with
+such fury as to make a landing impossible, but Donna Isabel declared
+this rock to be one of the islands of Armenio we had come in search of.
+As there were no other islands to be seen, we concluded that during the
+ages which had passed since the white-skinned people inhabited them,
+the continuous beating of the waves had gradually demolished the
+islands until nothing remained but the plateau of red rock to which we
+had come, and over which the sea sometimes swept in a mass of foam.
+But, having come to the island of her dreams, Donna Isabel would not
+leave it until we had ascertained, beyond doubt, that a landing was
+impracticable. It was not handsome, white-skinned natives whom we had
+come in search of, she said, but solid gold, which neither tempests nor
+seas can destroy. In order to satisfy her, we remained several days in
+the vicinity of this mass of rocks, hoping that the weather would
+moderate, so as to make possible a landing upon it, and at last we were
+rewarded for our patience by a lull in the heavy breakers, so that the
+pinnace, of which I took charge, was able to approach close to the
+steep and jagged shore. Thereupon six of the Spaniards leaped
+overboard, trusting to their skill as swimmers to make the land, which
+they did, remaining on shore for upward of an hour. When they returned
+they reported the rock to be a mass of auriferous quartz, in which was
+embedded more gold than they had ever thought to see in one place, but
+so tightly wedged was it between the crevices that they had been unable
+to bring any of it away except a few small specimens which they showed
+us. With picks and crowbars, however, they declared it would be easy to
+obtain an unlimited supply of gold.
+
+When we reported the finding of the gold to Donna Isabel, she vowed she
+would never consent to abandon the treasure. "The sea cannot always be
+rough," she said. "A calm must follow. Let us, therefore, wait in
+patience until it comes, so that we may land and enrich ourselves."
+
+Hartog, also, was in no mood to leave the gold until every effort had
+been made to obtain it, so we continued to beat about in the vicinity
+of the island awaiting a calm.
+
+After three weeks tossing on the ocean, during which time of stress we
+suffered much hardship by reason of our decks being continually
+drenched by the seas which swept us fore and aft, a calm suddenly fell,
+as it does in the tropics, without the least warning. Fortunately we
+were not far from the island when the calm fell, so that we lay within
+easy reach of it.
+
+Without loss of time we manned the two pinnaces, I taking command of
+one and Janstins of the other, and made for the shore. Donna Isabel
+insisted upon coming in my boat. She had discarded her feminine
+apparel, and now appeared in the sailor's clothes we had given her when
+she first came aboard. Hartog, as captain, remained in charge of the
+ship.
+
+When we came to the island we found no difficulty in landing, and were
+soon engaged with the picks and crow-bars we had brought with us, in
+the work of gold-getting. We found the report given by the Spanish
+sailors, who had been the first to land, to be somewhat exaggerated.
+Still, there was an abundance of gold between the crevices of the rock,
+and, what was more remarkable, we came upon what had evidently been
+vessels of beaten gold, thus proving beyond doubt that the island had
+formerly been inhabited.
+
+During the course of the morning we obtained as much gold mixed with
+quartz as the boats could conveniently carry, when we returned to the
+ship, intending, after our midday meal, to come back for a fresh supply
+of the precious metal, but on getting aboard we found Hartog much
+perturbed by the extraordinary behaviour of the compass, and the
+strange appearance of the sky.
+
+"I don't like the look of it, Peter," said Hartog, when we descended
+together to the cabin to discuss the situation. "I never knew this to
+happen before but once, and I am not anxious to repeat the experience.
+Unless I am greatly mistaken, there's something big coming."
+
+When we returned to the deck, a low moaning sound came to us across the
+sea, but, otherwise, there seemed to be nothing to cause anxiety. Donna
+Isabel wished to return to the island for more gold, but Hartog would
+not permit of any further expedition being made that day. He ordered
+the boats to be hoisted, and the treasure carried below. Every stitch
+of canvas had already been taken off the ship by the captain's orders,
+and we now rode upon a glassy sea under bare poles. Then the moaning
+increased, and presently there appeared upon the horizon a black line
+over which lightning played, although no clouds were visible. The
+atmosphere was at this time so oppressive that it was difficult to
+breathe.
+
+Hartog then ordered the helm to be lashed, the hatches to be put on,
+and all hands below, he and I being the last to quit the deck just as
+the storm broke upon us with hurricane force.
+
+For three days and nights we remained between, decks, with the hatches
+battened down, not knowing but that each moment might be our last. The
+noise was deafening, while the violent motion of the vessel made the
+getting about from one part of the ship to another difficult and
+dangerous. Food and water we obtained with difficulty, not at regular
+intervals, but when opportunity offered, crawling from one to another,
+and helping those who, from exhaustion, were least able to help
+themselves. The air became so foul in the cabin as to cause the ship's
+lanterns to burn dimly, so that we feared they would soon be
+extinguished. Thus we lived amid the raging elements, shut up in a
+storm-tossed coffin which we knew might go to pieces at any moment.
+
+At length, on the third day, Hartog ventured to open one of the
+hatches, when a rush of cool air came to us as we lay gasping below,
+bringing with it new life and vigour. The hurricane had passed, and
+although the wind and sea still ran high, we were told we might come on
+deck. But the happiness we felt at being released from our dreadful
+imprisonment was checked when we saw the havoc which had been wrought
+by the wind and the waves upon our ship. The decks were swept clean,
+the masts gone by the board, the larboard bulwarks stove in, while the
+cook's galley had disappeared.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLV
+
+SUMATRA
+
+
+All hands now set to work to cut away the wreckage of our masts and
+rigging, which, as the ship rolled in the trough of the sea, threatened
+to stave in the hull as the spars dashed against it with each recoil.
+Had it not been that the "Golden Seahorse" was a new ship, upon which
+no expense had been spared in the building, we must have foundered. But
+it was amid such scenes of storm and stress that the indomitable spirit
+of Dirk Hartog asserted itself, and seemed to animate both officers and
+crew with something of his own courage and determination. Forgetting
+the hardships and privations through which we had passed, we set to
+work, under the magic of his influence, with such goodwill that, in the
+space of some six hours, order had been evolved out of chaos, and our
+vessel once more rode the sea in safety. The pumps were then manned,
+when it was found that although much water was in the hold, it was
+easily gained upon, from which we concluded that no leak had sprung in
+our timbers, notwithstanding the battering they had received. Jury-masts
+were then rigged, upon which sufficient sail was set to give the ship
+steering way, when we hoped to make a harbour where we might refit, and
+effect necessary repairs.
+
+We were now anxious to reach some port where new masts and rigging
+might be obtained, as our progress under jury-masts, which carried only
+a limited spread of canvas, was necessarily slow. Donna Isabel was in
+favour of abandoning the "Golden Seahorse" at the first port we came to
+where another ship could be purchased to convey our treasure to Spain,
+but neither Hartog nor I would consent to this proposal, having no
+desire to see the interior of a Spanish prison, or to taste of the
+horrors of the Inquisition. It was astonishing how quickly Donna Isabel
+and her son, Pedro de Castro, appeared to have forgotten the obligation
+they were under to us for having rescued them from the desert island
+upon which they had been marooned. Both now spoke as if we were
+indebted to them for having put us in the way of enriching ourselves
+with the gold obtained from the Islands of Armenio, and Donna Isabel
+declared that the treasure really belonged to her, since she had
+possessed the secret which led to its discovery. I was so disgusted by
+the ingratitude of these Spaniards that I could hardly bring myself to
+speak of the matter with patience.
+
+Hartog now proposed that we should make for Sumatra, and as this
+proposal appeared to promise a way out of, our difficulties, I had
+nothing to say against it.
+
+Sumatra is one of the Sunda Islands, having Malacca on the north,
+Borneo on the east, Java on the south-east, and the Indian Ocean on the
+west. It is eight hundred miles long and about one hundred and fifty
+broad, and it possesses a fine harbour capable of containing any number
+of the largest ships. Here we arrived without mishap, within three
+weeks after setting our course for this port, and cast anchor in a
+sheltered spot close to the shore. The harbour is commanded by a strong
+fortress, well fortified, and mounted with cannon. Three ships were at
+anchor, a Spanish frigate and two smaller vessels, one flying the flag
+of England, and the other displaying the colours of the Netherlands.
+We had barely found our moorings when a boat from the man-o'-war came
+alongside, steered by a young Spanish officer, who bore as much
+arrogance in his demeanour as there was to be seen gold lace and brass
+buttons upon his uniform. He haughtily demanded an interview with the
+captain, but upon Hartog stepping forward his manner became less
+offensive, and finally they descended together to the cabin, being
+shortly afterward joined by Donna Isabel.
+
+Since I was not invited to this conference, I was forced to remain on
+deck, feeling very jealous of the influence which Donna Isabel exerted
+over Hartog, to the destruction of the mutual trust and confidence
+which had formerly existed between us. I felt, also, there was trouble
+in store for us. Hartog, although brave and resourceful upon the sea,
+was but a child when it came to dealing with business matters ashore,
+and I well knew that he would prove no match for the wily Spaniards
+with whom he was now in consultation.
+
+Presently the party from the cabin came on deck, when I perceived that
+Pedro de Castro was one of those who had been present at the
+conference. The young Spanish officer was now all smiles and
+affability, and Donna Isabel and her son, accompanying him to his boat,
+were rowed aboard the frigate.
+
+Hartog then came to me, and I could see he was worried, and ashamed at
+having shut me out from what had taken place in the cabin.
+
+"Forgive me, comrade," he said, "but Donna Isabel would have none
+present at the interview with the Spaniard save only myself and her son
+Pedro."
+
+"Since when has Donna Isabel Barreto become captain of this ship?" I
+asked.
+
+"Nay, Peter, I forgive thee that sneer," answered Hartog, "though I
+would not take it from another. It has been decided to transfer the
+treasure to the Spanish frigate, the captain of the warship undertaking
+to protect us while we remain in this port and to pay for all necessary
+repairs to our ship. These were the best terms I could make, and they
+seem to me fair enough."
+
+I had no desire to haggle over terms, for I was already rich enough to
+make me careless of what became of the gold we had taken from the
+Island of Armenio, but I realized how great was the influence Donna
+Isabel had acquired over Hartog in order to induce him to lay aside his
+claim to a part of the treasure.
+
+During the day a boat came from the frigate into which the gold was
+loaded and transferred to the warship, together with the Spaniards we
+had aboard of us, whom I was glad to be rid of on any terms, and that
+evening was the first upon which I had felt at home in our cabin since
+Donna Isabel and her people had joined us.
+
+It was a beautiful evening, with a gentle breeze off the shore--the
+very night, as I remarked to Hartog, to put to sea.
+
+"I wish we could up anchor and be off," answered Hartog. "But we have
+work to do ashore in attending to the ship's repairs before we may hope
+to leave this place where, I make no doubt, we shall be imposed upon
+and robbed by the sweepings of Europe who inhabit this island. It is
+fortunate we have the word of the Spanish captain that he himself will
+be responsible for all we need."
+
+I did not answer, for I did not share in Hartog's sanguine expectations
+regarding the Spaniards. I had experienced too many acts of treachery
+to trust them, and there existed, as I knew, at this time, a natural
+antipathy between the Netherlands and Spain, which made any binding
+compact between the people of these rival nations impossible. I did
+not, however, voice my suspicions lest my opposition might be
+attributed to jealousy.
+
+As sometimes happens, I was unable to sleep that night, my thoughts
+taking wing among the many scenes of adventure through which I had
+passed, and refusing to compose themselves to rest. With the dawn I was
+up and on deck. As I stepped upon the poop and looked around upon the
+quiet harbour where the ships rode at anchor, I became aware of a
+certain emptiness in the bay. I rubbed my eyes and looked again. The
+Spanish frigate was gone.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLVI
+
+MAHOMET ACHMET
+
+
+When Hartog was told of the treachery of Donna Isabel Barreto, in
+stealing our portion of the gold obtained from the island of Armenio,
+and leaving us, for all she knew or cared, without the means to repair
+our vessel, he did not show so much anger as I expected. He seemed more
+to regret the loss of Donna Isabel than the treasure with which she had
+so heartlessly decamped.
+
+"She was a clever woman, Peter," was all he said to me in reference to
+the matter, "and I shall miss her." Then he clapped me on the shoulder,
+and bade me not despond. "We still have the rubies," he reminded me,
+"which, properly invested, will more than pay for all we need."
+
+I had forgotten the rubies, but I stipulated that the disposal of them
+should be left in my hands.
+
+"Willingly, Peter," replied Hartog, "for, between ourselves, I doubt
+not I am more at home on the sea than in making a bargain with
+land-rogues ashore. Take you command of the ship until she is once
+more taut and trim."
+
+To this I agreed, although I had no intention of depriving Hartog of
+his authority, and, after breakfast, I landed with a boat's crew, in
+order to interview the islanders, and, if possible, to make
+arrangements with some of them for the equipment of our vessel.
+
+Achin, the metropolis of Sumatra, is situated at the north-west end of
+the island. It stands on a plain, surrounded by woods and marshes,
+about five miles distant from the sea, near to a pleasant rivulet. The
+city consists of some eight thousand houses which take up more ground
+than a city of this size would demand by reason of every person
+surrounding his dwelling with a palisade that stands some yards distant
+from it. The inhabitants are, in general, small, and of very swarthy
+complexion. They have black eyes, flat faces, and high check-bones.
+Their hair is long and black, and they take great pains to dye their
+teeth black. They also besmear their bodies with oil, as do the natives
+of other hot countries, to protect themselves from being stung by
+insects, while they let their nails grow exceedingly long, scraping
+them until they are transparent, and dyeing them vermilion. The poorer
+class go almost naked, having only a small piece of cloth round the
+waist, and a piece of linen about the head, or a cap made of leaves
+resembling the crown of a hat. The richer sort wear white breeches to
+above the knee, and a piece of calico, or silk, wrapped round their
+loins and thrown over the left shoulder. Some wear sandals, but all are
+bare-legged and bare-bodied from the waist upward. The common language
+among them is the Malayan language, and, by speaking to some whom I met
+on landing, I found I was able to make myself understood, and to
+understand, though imperfectly, what was said to me. The Sumatrans are
+a very indolent race of people, which accounted for the small interest
+they took in the arrival of our ship, none thinking it worth while to
+come aboard, or to make any inquiry concerning us.
+
+When I explained that my business was to obtain new masts and rigging I
+was directed to the house of an Arab named Mahomet Achmet, a carpenter
+and ship chandler, if such he could be called, who traded with vessels
+visiting the island, and dealt with them in the matter of repairs or
+refitting. Mahomet, like all the inhabitants of Sumatra, spoke the
+Malayan language, but we occasionally helped each other with Spanish or
+Dutch words, of which he had acquired the meaning by his intercourse
+with crews of these nationalities. When I told him we required masts as
+well as rigging, he seemed to consider my request unreasonable. There
+were masts on the island, he said, good ones too, made of beech, but
+they belonged to the king, who set great store by them, since they had
+come to him as the result of a victory by the fort over a foreign
+vessel which had attempted to raid the island and take by force what
+could only honestly be obtained by trade. On my asking to see the king
+Mahomet turned up his eyes with an exclamation of astonishment at my
+audacity. No foreigners were permitted to see the king, he said. It was
+death to enter without permission the inner apartments of the palace
+where the king lived. But when I produced one of my rubies he became
+less demonstrative in his protestations against my proposed visit.
+
+"It is for these toys that I would trade with the king," I said to him,
+as I held up the red crystal to the light in order that he might see it
+better.
+
+"Such toys the king likes well," answered Achmet. "Give it me, and I
+will send it to the king, and ask if he will receive you."
+
+"Nay, Achmet," I answered, "I will not part with my jewels save only to
+the king himself. Send, therefore, and tell him that a rich merchant
+from the East is here to trade for gems such as are only fit for kings
+to handle."
+
+I could now see that Mahomet Achmet was on the horns of a dilemma. His
+natural cupidity urged him to rob me of my jewels, but should this come
+to the king's knowledge he would doubtless suffer for having taken the
+law into his own hands. Finally he consented to send a message to the
+king on my promising that not only would I pay him liberally for such
+ship-chandlery as he might supply us with, but that if all went well I
+would present him with a ruby of equal value to that which I had shown
+him before I left the island.
+
+While the messenger was absent on his mission, Mahomet gave me some
+interesting information regarding his Malayan Majesty. The king, he
+said, owned a large number of horses, as well as elephants, all having
+magnificent trappings. He was at no expense in time of war, for all his
+subjects were obliged to march at their own expense, and to carry with
+them provisions for three months. In peace time his Majesty's living
+and that of his household cost him nothing, for his subjects supplied
+him with all kinds of provisions. He was, besides, heir to all those of
+his people who died without male issue, and to all foreigners who died
+within his territories, while he succeeded to the property of all those
+who were put to death for offences against the law.
+
+From this it will be seen that the revenue of this prince is very
+considerable, and that he is personally interested in the death of
+foreigners within his kingdom, whether from natural causes or in the
+execution of the law, of which he is the sole arbiter.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLVII
+
+KING TRINKITAT
+
+
+The space of an hour had barely elapsed since the sending of the
+messenger to King Trinkitat of Sumatra, announcing my arrival in his
+dominions, before an answer was brought me that his Majesty desired my
+attendance at the palace forthwith, so I made ready to accompany those
+he had sent for me, and who acted as my bodyguard.
+
+The king's palace stands in the middle of the town, its grounds being
+oval in shape, and about a half-mile in circumference, surrounded by a
+moat twenty-five feet broad, and as many deep. All round the palace
+there are cast up great heaps of earth instead of a wall, planted with
+reeds and canes that grow to a prodigious height and thickness. These
+reeds are continually green, so that there is no danger of fire. There
+is no ditch or drawbridge before the gates leading to the palace, but,
+on each side, a wall of stone, about ten feet high, that supports a
+terrace on which some guns are planted. A small stream runs through the
+middle of the palace, which is lined with stone, and has steps down to
+the bottom of it for the convenience of bathers. There were four gates
+and as many courts to be passed before we came to the royal apartments,
+and in some of these outer courts are kept the king's magazines of
+rifles and cannon. Here also are stalls for the king's elephants. In
+the king's magazines are to be found numerous cannon, and a quantity of
+small arms, while his guards consist of a thousand men. But his
+greatest strength is in his elephants, which are trained to trample
+upon fire, and to stand unmoved at the report of artillery.
+
+When we came to the inner courts, beyond which were the apartments of
+the king, our bodyguard halted, and Mahomet Achmet and I entered the
+king's presence unattended.
+
+We found his Majesty seated on a divan surrounded by his numerous wives
+and slaves, to the number of several hundred, for the apartment in
+which the king received us was a very large one, more resembling a
+courtyard than a room, since the roof was open to the sky. The king
+seemed to be a man of middle age, whom I judged to be about forty years
+old, but his attendants were all young, some of them scarcely more than
+children.
+
+All were attired in the same manner, so that it was difficult to tell
+their sex, with short white breeches to above the knee, silken scarves
+of various colours wrapped round their waists, the end being thrown
+over the left shoulder, and white turbans upon their heads, into which
+their long hair was gathered. Some were yellow-skinned, others brown,
+others again jet-black. All had been rubbed with oil so that their
+skins glistened like polished marble, and they stood about the
+courtyard or around the king in silent groups, like so many statues.
+
+Mahomet Achmet prostrated himself when he came into the king's
+presence, as is the manner of the East; but I contented myself with
+bowing low as I approached the divan upon which his Majesty sat, very
+gorgeously dressed in red and blue silk robes embroidered with golden
+dragons, which I concluded he had obtained from China. Upon his head he
+wore a white turban with a jewelled aigrette of great value. His
+countenance was intellectual, and his expression shrewd.
+
+King Trinkitat received me graciously, and ordered a stool to be placed
+near to the divan so that I might sit and converse with him upon the
+matter in hand. When I showed him some of my rubies he at once said,
+"These come from the South Land," and upon my asking him how he had
+arrived at this conclusion, he answered that some of his people visited
+annually the South Land to trade with the natives, and had reported a
+white ruler there among a tribe of savages who had in his possession a
+great quantity of valuable jewels, which he would not part with for
+money, but only in exchange for certain commodities, by the aid of
+which he was making the tribe he governed the most powerful upon the
+Southern Continent.
+
+"What is the name of this white chief, your Majesty?" I asked, deeply
+interested.
+
+"King Luck," answered Trinkitat; "but I thought you came from him."
+
+"That is not so, O king," I replied. "These rubies are magic rubies
+that are found only in a valley guarded by serpents. If they are
+honestly acquired they bring great happiness to those who possess them,
+but if they are stolen, or dishonestly come by, they bring a curse upon
+the robbers, and upon the land in which they dwell and all the people
+who inhabit it."
+
+At this I thought the king appeared disappointed. I had reckoned on his
+being superstitious, and indeed it is well known that certain jewels do
+possess mysterious qualities that influence the lives of those who own
+them, although I had no authority, beyond my own perspicacity, for
+endowing my rubies with supernatural charm.
+
+"How many of these jewels have you?" asked the king, holding one of the
+rubies up to the light.
+
+I mentioned the number as being thirty, that being half of all I
+possessed.
+
+"There is not enough money upon the island to pay a fair price for
+these stones," declared Trinkitat, "and how should it benefit me if I
+acquire them for less than their fair value if, in that case, they are
+to bring upon me and my people a curse rather than a blessing?"
+
+"Nay, O king," I answered, "I ask no money for these gems, but rather
+your good offices in helping us repair our vessel, which, after much
+storm and stress, has found in your harbour a haven of rest."
+
+"That you shall have, and welcome," replied the king, and after some
+further explanation as to what was required, and more bargaining, it
+was finally agreed that I would allow the king to retain the six rubies
+I had brought with me, and that the balance of the thirty, which I
+offered, was to be paid over when our vessel had been new masted and
+fresh rigged at the king's expense. Mahomet Achmet was given directions
+to see that this work was promptly carried out, after which we bowed
+ourselves from the king's presence, I being well satisfied with the
+bargain I had made.
+
+Next day the work of repairing the ship began. She was careened in the
+shallows of a safe and convenient harbour, and such an army of workers
+set to work upon her that in the course of a week the "Golden Seahorse"
+was once more ready for sea.
+
+While the repairs to our vessel were in progress we received welcome
+assistance from the crews of the English and Dutch ships in the
+harbour, with whom we soon became acquainted. The Dutch vessel
+"Speedwell" belonged to the Dutch East India Company, a company which,
+at this time, was growing in wealth and importance. She was bound on a
+voyage to the North for a cargo of furs, and Captain Smuts, in command
+of her, was anxious that we should join him in this expedition, for,
+said he, two ships will more readily succeed than one, since each may
+help the other. But we not being equipped for northern travel decided
+to continue our voyage south, though we arranged with Captain Smuts to
+meet him later at the Molucca Islands, where we had resolved to call
+King Thedori to account for his treacherous conduct toward us on our
+former visit.
+
+Before leaving the island of Sumatra I paid a second visit to Achin,
+where I was given a final audience with King Trinkitat, when I paid him
+over the balance of the rubies. I found the king well disposed toward
+me, and apparently satisfied with the payment made him in return for
+the refitting of our vessel, which indeed was at a princely rate, when
+the value of the rubies was considered. He did not attempt to extort
+more than was justly due to him according to promise, as is the habit
+with these half-savage potentates, when dealing with foreigners, but
+this I attributed to the superstition I had so happily aroused in him
+that the rubies would bring misfortune if not honestly come by. I
+questioned his Majesty more closely with regard to King Luck, and, from
+what he told me, I felt convinced that this man, now a chief among the
+savages of New Holland, was none other than my old antagonist Van Luck,
+though how he came to be rescued from the sea I had no means, at that
+time, of knowing. King Trinkitat possessed no chart of the place to
+which his ships traded, as the captains of his vessels mostly steered
+by the stars. But he promised me that, if ever I should again visit his
+island, he would send a pilot with me to conduct me to King Luck.
+
+Mahomet Achmet, with whom I parted the best of friends, expressed the
+hope that we would one day meet again.
+
+"I will not sell this jewel, Signor Peter," he said to me when I paid
+him for his work with some money we had aboard the ship, and presented
+him with a fine ruby, according to promise. "I will keep it in memory
+of a shrewd man whose wit did more to save him than his money, for I
+may tell you that neither you nor your ship's company would have been
+allowed to leave this place had you not spoken to the king of the
+ill-luck which these rubies bring to those who come not honestly by
+them."
+
+I thanked Mahomet for his frankness, which I promised to remember
+should I ever have occasion to revisit Sumatra.
+
+And now, all being ready, we put to sea, and by evening the island of
+Sumatra had disappeared beyond the horizon.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLVIII
+
+STATEN LAND
+
+
+Hartog believed, from an ancient Portuguese chart which we had with us,
+that an island continent lay to the south-east, and after a lengthened
+period, during which we encountered bad weather and rough sea, we
+sighted a formidable coastline, which appeared to be a mainland
+extending on either side as far as the eye could reach. We coasted
+along this new-found country for several days in search of a landing
+place, without being able to find one, the coast being a continuous
+line of precipitous rocks. Toward the end of the third day we
+encountered a canoe, the largest we had seen, containing upward of one
+hundred natives. We offered food and other articles, but, although the
+canoe came quite close to us, none of her people could be induced to
+come on board.
+
+These natives appeared to be strong and fierce, nor did they show the
+least fear of us, but rather an intention to begin hostilities when an
+opportunity should offer. In view of this we loaded our brass cannon,
+and made ready a supply of ammunition in case they should attack us.
+But after keeping company with us for some time the canoe made off, and
+Hartog had no mind to follow it.
+
+Next morning we hove to off a pebbly beach, upon which I undertook to
+land a boat's crew and examine the country. Hartog sent two boats, one
+in my charge and the other in charge of Janstins. The sea was smooth,
+so that we had no difficulty in running the boats ashore, where,
+leaving a man aboard each, the rest of us followed the course of a
+stream inland. Here we soon came to a valley so beautiful as almost to
+defy description. Colossal trees rose to a great height above our
+heads, festooned with a flowering creeper which resembled a bridal
+veil, whilst emerald green ferns stretched their fronds into a stream
+which descended from the higher land beyond by a series of cascades. A
+kind of flax plant grew here, with leaves over nine feet long, and
+bearing a flower which looked like a bunch of feather plumes, whilst
+palms and cabbage trees abounded everywhere in great profusion.
+
+My attention was diverted from the beauties which surrounded us by some
+strange footprints which I noticed on the soft ground near the stream,
+and which appeared to have been made by a bird or two-legged animal of
+prodigious size. The footprints measured fully three feet in length,
+and I fell to wondering what kind of a creature it could be who had
+made them, when I was startled by a cry from one of our men, which
+caused me to look in the direction whence it came. At a distance of
+some fifty yards from where I stood I then perceived a huge, wingless
+bird. Its head, armed with a formidable beak, reared full twenty feet
+from the ground; its body, big as an ox, and covered with black
+bristles, supported upon legs thicker than the girth of a man. As yet
+this prodigy had not observed us, for it was stalking quietly among the
+trees, followed by a brood of chickens, each larger than the biggest
+ostrich I had ever seen.
+
+I now noticed that one of these chickens had strayed from the others,
+and I saw Janstins, who had evidently not observed the mother-bird,
+aiming his matchlock at it as though about to fire. I shouted to him to
+desist, but too late to save the mad fellow from his folly. There was a
+flash, and a loud report, and the giant chicken lay on its back, its
+legs kicking in the air.
+
+"To the boats!" I cried, and the scared sailors, when they saw the
+mother-bird, needed no second warning. There was a rush for the boats
+by all but Janstins, who seemed as one amazed, and incapable of action
+at the sight of the monster. I could not leave him to the fate which
+threatened him, so, running to his assistance, I dragged him down
+behind some fern trees, where we hid out of sight of the mother-bird,
+who seemed bewildered by the unaccustomed sound of firearms, and
+perplexed at the death of her chick, for which she could not account.
+But we both knew that her inaction was momentary, and that when she
+discovered us we must expect the full force of her rage, which could
+only result in the loss of our lives. Whispering to Janstins, I bade
+him remember that in courage and caution alone lay our hope of escape,
+and he presently recovered his presence of mind sufficiently to follow
+me when we ran, bent double, under cover of the luxuriant foliage, to
+the beach, where we arrived only just in time to scramble into the
+second boat that was being shoved off by the terrified sailors, before
+the mother-bird, now joined by her mate of even larger proportion, came
+in pursuit of us, and so carried away were these monsters by rage at
+our escape that they advanced into the sea, stretching their necks at
+us while uttering a loud, drumming noise which we could hear repeated
+when we were on board the ship, and even after we were out at sea.
+
+Next morning, at daybreak, we again made the coast, and toward evening
+we found ourselves opposite a sandy beach upon which a number of
+natives appeared to be engaged in some tribal ceremony. Fires were
+lighted along the sea shore, and, upon drawing nearer, we were able to
+distinguish groups of men, apparently captives, with their hands bound
+behind them, standing together while their captors performed an
+extravagant dance round them. Armed warriors then rushed upon each
+other in mimic warfare, and the sound of their bare feet, as they
+stamped in unison upon the hard sand, came to us with measured cadence
+across the sea. When the dance was ended, the captives were made to lie
+flat, one behind the other, till they formed a black patch upon the
+beach. Then appeared a number of men pushing from above high-water mark
+a war canoe, the prow of which, elaborately carved, and upstanding to
+the height of thirty feet, was decorated with shells and bunches of
+feathers. On came the canoe, slowly at first, and then with increasing
+speed, until it reached the row of victims, over whom it crunched,
+taking the water reddened with their blood amid an uproar of shrieks
+and groans most dreadful to listen to.
+
+Not wishing to engage these savages, Hartog stood out to sea, but so
+fearless were they that when they saw us they came in pursuit of us.
+Over twenty canoes crowded with natives put off from the shore, but we
+greeted them with shots from our brass cannon, which sent them back
+quicker than they came, many being observed to fall after each
+discharge of grapeshot and canister amongst them.
+
+We left this country, which Hartog named Staten Land, in honour of the
+States of Holland, with an unfavourable impression of its inhabitants,
+who appeared to be bloodthirsty savages, prone to hostility without
+provocation.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER XLIX
+
+THE CANNIBAL ISLANDS
+
+
+After leaving Staten Land we sailed west to between the fifteenth and
+twenty-first parallels of south latitude, when we fell in with a number
+of islands, some of considerable extent, while others were mere islets
+of sand and rock, uninhabited except by sea-fowl and turtle. A great
+barrier reef surrounds the group to the eastward, leaving the southern
+quarter open. This barrier is broken by numerous passages, between
+which navigation is possible, but dangerous, except in fine weather. In
+addition to the great barrier, every island has an encircling reef of
+its own. The general appearance of these islands is bold and striking.
+They are perhaps the mountain tops of some sunken continent. The island
+upon which we landed was one of the largest of the group, with a
+background of wooded hills, and a fringe of palm trees to the beach,
+beyond which a native village stood among green foliage.
+
+We found the inhabitants of this island not nearly so friendly as other
+savages we had met with. The men were larger, and bore a ferocious
+aspect. The chief wore a necklace of whales' teeth, his hair frizzled
+into a mop, which stood out from his head, coloured to a reddish-brown.
+His skin was a light brown, with no tattoo marks upon it, but shiny, as
+if rubbed with oil. He carried a club and spear of elaborate
+workmanship, and wore a cloth petticoat made from the bark of a tree,
+and painted with some skill in its design. His followers were
+similarly, but not so strikingly, clad, the women wearing feathers in
+their hair, and a peculiar leaf from a tree, which looked like white
+satin. Altogether this race appeared to be possessed of a far higher
+state of civilization than the people in Terra Australis. They were,
+however, openly addicted to cannibalism, and made no secret of this
+abominable practice.
+
+These natives did not display any hostility at our landing, nor did
+they express any surprise at the presents we made them of beads and
+bright cloth, although they accepted what we gave them with avidity.
+We stayed at this island for nearly two months, during which time we
+learnt something of the customs of the people, and I was able, after a
+while, to understand some of their language. It seemed that these
+savages were continually at war with one another, and the boom of the
+great wooden war drums was always sounding somewhere in the group. It
+was from prisoners taken in battle that men were provided for cannibal
+feasts, hence there was never lacking a cause for quarrel. The
+prisoners were kept in a compound, where they were fattened for the pot
+and killed when wanted.
+
+These islanders were industrious in their own way. They built
+comfortable houses, and made excellent pottery capable of withstanding
+the heat of fire when used for cooking. Their boat-builders constructed
+sea-going canoes capable of travelling long distances. They also made a
+delicate cloth from the bark of the mulberry tree, upon which they
+printed from wooden blocks patterns of great elegance. Their spears and
+clubs also showed much taste in their construction and ornamentation.
+The women made fishing nets of coconut fibre, with which they captured
+an abundance of fish. The tribes on the different islands kept up a
+system of barter with one another, exchanging commodities, the making
+of which was their hereditary occupation. A son followed the occupation
+of his father, and for him to have followed any other occupation would
+have been regarded as an offence against ancestors. A son was expected
+to do exactly as his father did before him, and to do it in the same
+way.
+
+One day when I was fishing outside the reef, I was startled by a cry,
+and looking toward whence it came I perceived a young girl in evident
+terror, swimming for the reef with the black fin of a shark close upon
+her. Going to her assistance I managed, at some risk, to drive off the
+shark, and, pulling the girl into my boat I took her on board our ship,
+where I delighted her with a present of printed calico with which to
+reign as a queen of fashion among her tribe. When I took her ashore she
+showed her gratitude by taking my hand in hers, and placing it upon her
+forehead, which meant the making of a compact between us that she would
+lay down her life for me if occasion should require. It was to this
+that we subsequently owed our escape from death.
+
+We had not found anything profitable to trade from these islands with
+the exception of sandal wood and tortoiseshell, of which we obtained a
+supply, but I noticed that the chief did not appear to grudge anything
+we took from him. It became a joke among our crew that they could have
+anything for the asking, and the ship was soon a museum of island
+curiosities. This aroused my suspicion, for I knew the cupidity of
+savages, and how they always try to take all and give nothing in
+return.
+
+Toward the end of our visit, I also observed that numbers of savages
+from the adjacent islands began to arrive in canoes, and that
+preparations were being made for a feast. It was then that I noticed
+the girl I had saved from the shark was often to be seen standing on
+the beach opposite to the ship, gazing at the vessel long and
+earnestly. Thinking she wished to come on board again, I went in my
+boat to fetch her, but when I met her she showed great alarm lest we
+should be seen speaking together, and, urging me to follow her, she led
+me to a secluded spot of the island, in order that we might be free
+from observation. Here she confided to me the treachery of Vale Vulu,
+the chief whose guests we were.
+
+It appeared from this girl's account of the matter that Vale Vulu's
+professed friendship for us was only a blind in order that he might
+attack us unawares. To this end he had invited certain tribes from some
+of the adjacent islands, with whom he happened to be on friendly terms,
+to a feast, the principal food of which was to consist of the dead
+bodies of our crew. His own tribe, unaided, he did not consider strong
+enough for this enterprise, but with the assistance of the friendly
+cannibals, whom he invited to the banquet, he made no doubt that he
+would easily be able to overcome us, particularly as we were to be
+taken unawares. The plan was to invite us to the feast, which we would
+be told was to consist only of fish, coconuts, and bananas, but, when
+we were seated, at a given signal we would be massacred and eaten,
+after which Vale Vulu would take possession of our ship and all that
+belonged to us.
+
+The poor girl, when she had finished her story, confessed she would no
+doubt suffer death by torture for having betrayed the plot. I tried to
+induce her to come on board with me, but she refused, saying that if
+she did so an attack would be made upon us at once, where our ship lay,
+helpless, in the lagoon. I could not but see the force of her argument,
+and, as the matter was too urgent to admit of delay, I hurried on board
+and informed Hartog of what I had heard.
+
+Our plans were soon made. All hands were told to be in readiness to man
+the boats in order to tow the ship out of the lagoon during the night,
+when we would depend upon a breeze to escape from these bloodthirsty
+savages. Arms and ammunition were served to the crew, and our brass
+cannon was loaded to the muzzle with grape and canister.
+
+During the early part of the night we could see lights on the shore,
+whilst the beating of war drums and the sound of wooden horns continued
+to a late hour. At last all was still, when we slipped our anchor, and
+began the arduous task of towing the ship out of the lagoon through the
+opening in the reef which marked a break in the line of white surf.
+During the night we laboured at the oars, and when morning broke we had
+succeeded in towing the ship into the open sea for some distance from
+the land. But our peril was by no means at an end. An absolute calm
+prevailed, and unless a breeze came in time we feared the savages would
+put off in their war canoes to attack us. Nor in this were we mistaken,
+for we presently heard a great beating of drums and blowing of horns,
+while we could see the savages crowding on to the reef, from which they
+watched us lying becalmed. Ten canoes then came through the opening in
+the reef, each containing some one hundred savages, and were paddled
+rapidly toward us.
+
+When the canoes came within range our brass cannon accounted for one of
+them, on board of which I hoped was the traitor Vale Vulu, but the
+others came on, and there is little doubt that by force of numbers we
+must have been overpowered had not the breeze, which we could now see
+approaching, come in time to save us. The canoes were all round us, and
+the savages had already begun to swarm on to our decks, when the sails
+filled and the "Golden Seahorse" began to gather way. We were now
+incensed against the cannibals for their treacherous conduct, and many
+fell to the discharge of our muskets. With our cutlasses we soon drove
+those who had ventured upon the ship into the sea, and a second
+discharge from our brass cannon disabled one of the largest remaining
+canoes, when the others made off. As our ship bowed to the waves of the
+ocean we were able once more to breathe freely, and, taking a last look
+at the island, I fancied I saw a dark form hurl itself from one of the
+highest cliffs upon the rocks below. Was it the brave girl, I wondered,
+who had saved us, and who had thus escaped torture by destroying
+herself?
+
+
+
+CHAPTER L
+
+AGAIN AT THE MOLUCCAS
+
+
+Hartog was anxious, before returning home, that we should call again at
+the Molucca Islands, and demand an explanation, together with a ransom
+of pearls, from King Thedori, for having treated us so scurvily on our
+former visit. We knew that this treacherous chief depended for the
+success of his piratical schemes on taking by surprise those for whom
+he pretended friendship, and for that reason we had arranged to meet
+the "Speedwell" so that we might, by strategy, pay Thedori back in his
+own coin, capture him, and hold him to ransom.
+
+Now we knew that if Thedori, or any of the people, caught but a glimpse
+of the "Golden Seahorse", they would make ready to attack her with all
+the force at their command, but the "Speedwell" was unknown to them,
+and there were many harbours among the Moluccas where our ship might
+remain unnoticed while our plans were matured. The plan we had formed
+was a simple one, and was therefore the more likely to succeed. It was,
+shortly, as follows. On reaching the Moluccas we would choose a
+convenient harbour as the base of our enterprise, when the "Speedwell"
+would set out alone for the island ruled over by Thedori, where we had
+no doubt the captain and crew would be well received, as is the habit
+of this crafty king when dealing with strangers, in order that he may
+eventually pillage them. Thedori was to be invited by Captain Smuts to
+go aboard his vessel to inspect the cargo of furs and other goods in
+which he proposed to trade. Once on board the "Speedwell", the King of
+the Moluccas would be kidnapped, and brought away to where the "Golden
+Seahorse" was at anchor, when Hartog undertook to deal with him.
+
+Captain Smuts, whom we found waiting us at the Moluccas, was very ready
+to fall in with this plan when we told him of the large pearls that
+were to be found at the island, some of which we intended to demand as
+the King's ransom for being allowed to return to his people.
+
+The island we had chosen as the base for our operations happened to be
+the one of which we had been told on our former visit that the men
+possessed such large ears that with one ear they could, when they
+liked, cover the whole of their heads; for when we landed, and met the
+natives, we observed in them this remarkable peculiarity. Their heads
+were the smallest and their ears the largest that I have ever seen in
+human beings. The intelligence of these savages was as small as their
+heads. They showed no interest in us, and seemed to be indifferent to
+our appearance among them. This stupidity on their part, however, so
+far from giving us any anxiety, rather commended itself to us, since it
+appeared unlikely they would attempt to interfere with our plans.
+
+When we had rested and refreshed ourselves for three days at this
+island, the "Speedwell" set out upon her voyage to the main island,
+leaving the "Golden Seahorse" to await her return. In order that I
+might advise and consult with Captain Smuts with regard to our project,
+I became his passenger on the "Speedwell", it being understood that I
+was to keep out of sight until Thedori was safely aboard. So, every
+precaution being taken in order to ensure success, we arrived at the
+main island during the afternoon of the day we had set out, and cast
+anchor in the bay from which, nearly six years before, in the "Golden
+Seahorse", I had escaped with Hartog and our crew from the captivity
+which Thedori had intended for us after capturing our vessel.
+
+I had no pity for the man whom we had come to call to account, for, to
+my mind, treachery is the worst of crimes. An open enemy may be fairly
+encountered, but a snake in the grass can only be met by the same
+serpent tricks as he plays upon others, and when I thought of the
+welcome Thedori had given us at our first interview with him, when he
+had exhorted us to land in safety so that we might enjoy the comforts
+of life and recruit our strength, in order, as it subsequently
+transpired, that he might betray us, I felt that no reprisals could be
+too severe against one guilty of such roguish deception.
+
+The city of Porne appeared unchanged from when I had last seen it.
+There were a few new houses close to the beach, but otherwise the city
+itself, with its low-built cabins and regular streets, was the same.
+
+I was greatly surprised, however, upon entering the harbour to see the
+Spanish frigate, upon which Donna Isabel Barreto had decamped with the
+gold taken front the island of Armenio, at anchor close to the shore.
+What could have brought the frigate here, and kept her here for so long
+a time since I had last seen her at Sumatra, I was at a loss to
+understand. The unexpected appearance of this vessel seemed likely to
+complicate our plans, and I determined to elucidate the mystery before
+proceeding with the matter in hand.
+
+It was late in the afternoon when we cast anchor in Porne Harbour, and
+that night the same wonderful display of glow-worms showed itself among
+the woods on shore. It was then also that I knew that the black bats
+would be abroad, so as to make it unlikely our movements would be
+observed, since the inhabitants of Porne would be shut up in their
+houses.
+
+So, when all was still, I took the smallest of the ship's boats, and
+was rowed in the direction of the frigate.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER LI
+
+GETTING BACK OUR OWN
+
+
+We took no lantern with us in the boat upon our expedition to board the
+Spanish frigate, trusting to the light of the stars, and that given by
+the glow-worms on shore, to guide us, and as we approached the frigate
+we observed her also to be in darkness, with no sign of life on board.
+
+When we came alongside I climbed to the deck by the anchor-chain, when
+I found the ship to be deserted, with hatches on, and the doors to the
+cabins securely locked. So, judging we had nothing to fear from the
+Spaniards, we returned to the "Speedwell" as silently as we had come. I
+did not tell Captain Smuts of the treasure which I believed to be still
+upon the frigate, as I desired, in the first place, to consult with
+Hartog as to the course to be adopted regarding it. Captain Smuts, on
+receiving my report that the Spanish ship was apparently out of
+commission, concluded that no change need be made in our original plan,
+the preparations for the carrying out of which were accordingly
+proceeded with.
+
+Next morning, after breakfast, the captain of the "Speedwell" and his
+officers, in their best uniforms, and with a picked boat's crew, set
+out for the shore, taking with them presents for King Thedori and his
+chiefs, with a view to establishing friendly relations with them. In
+the course of an hour they returned, when, the captain repeated to me
+the greeting given him by the King of the Moluccas, which was almost
+word for word that extended to Hartog at the time of his visit in the
+"Golden Seahorse". Evidently King Thedori had a set speech wherewith to
+welcome his guests whom he afterwards intended to plunder. Captain
+Smuts was so impressed by the amiable bearing and fair words of the
+King that he found it hard to believe so much treachery could lurk
+behind such a frank and open exterior. Thedori, he said, had promised
+to come on board the "Speedwell" next day to inspect the furs, and
+arrange about the price to be paid for them. On my asking if any
+Spaniards had been met with ashore, Captain Smuts replied that he had
+not seen any, so we had no means of ascertaining what had become of
+Donna Isabel and her people, as well as the captain and crew of the
+frigate.
+
+Next morning King Thedori came on board the "Speedwell" in the
+captain's boat, which had been sent for him. He did not bring with him
+any of his guards or attendants, not having the least suspicion of the
+trap we had laid. It was only when he came into the cabin that his
+suspicions were aroused, and it was then too late for him to retreat. I
+was sitting at the table when Smuts brought him in, and was presented
+to him as part owner of the furs. I saw him start when our eyes met,
+but otherwise he gave no sign that he knew me. There was wine and other
+refreshment upon the table, of which he was invited to partake, but
+declined, and then, after some further conversation between us, Captain
+Smuts, according to arrangement, made excuse to go on deck, leaving
+Thedori and I alone together.
+
+Thedori was the first to speak, and I could see that his small black
+eyes glittered dangerously when he looked at me.
+
+"We have met before, senor," he said, addressing me, as he had done at
+our first meeting, as though I was a Spaniard.
+
+"Yes," I answered; "I was once the King's guest, welcomed with fair
+words, and offered the hospitality of his kingdom. Yet, had not chance
+intervened, I doubt I had been here to-day to welcome the King as a
+guest, in my turn, aboard this vessel."
+
+Thedori rose, and went to the cabin door. It was locked, but he showed
+no surprise at finding himself a prisoner. He had probably heard the
+captain turn the key on the other side of the door when he went out.
+
+"What is it you want of me?" he asked, coming back to the table and
+resuming his seat. He spoke with assumed carelessness, but I could see
+that his face was livid. I pushed the wine-jar toward him.
+
+"Drink," I said. "You will need it. The wine is not poisoned."
+
+With the ghost of a smile he filled a goblet which stood at his elbow,
+but his hand shook when he raised it to his lips.
+
+And now the noise of the anchor being hove aboard, and the usual
+commotion on deck preparatory to setting sail, arrested his attention.
+
+"Come," said he, "I would make terms with you. What is it you want."
+
+But at this I shook my head.
+
+"Promises and fair words once broken cannot be repeated," I answered.
+"Besides, I am not alone in this business. There are others who must be
+consulted. But you will soon learn the terms of your ransom."
+
+At this I thought he appeared relieved. He probably expected that we
+intended to murder him.
+
+I had given instructions for a prize crew to be put on board the
+frigate, so that both vessels might leave the harbour together and
+presently I felt, by the motion of the ship, that the "Speedwell" was
+at sea.
+
+During our passage to the place where Hartog awaited us, King Thedori
+and I continued to sit, one on each side of the cabin table, without
+speaking, and when we had cast anchor, and Hartog joined us, Thedori,
+who had made up his mind to the inevitable, calmly awaited our terms,
+which, stated briefly, were that he should pay for his ransom, to each
+ship, one hundred pearls of the size of dove's eggs, and that the cargo
+of the frigate was to be transferred to the "Golden Seahorse". To the
+first part of our demand the King made some demur, but when we
+threatened to take him away with us on our voyage home, he promised to
+send some of the big-eared men for his ransom if we would give him
+speech with their chief. To the latter part of our demand Thedori
+readily agreed.
+
+"You will find nothing on board the frigate," he said, "but some bags
+of stone ballast in the hold. Everything else of value has long since
+been taken on shore, and is being made use of by my people."
+
+While the messengers were away procuring the King's ransom, we
+questioned Thedori as to how the Spanish frigate came to fall into his
+hands, when we learnt that some time since, during a calm, the frigate,
+caught by one of the strong currents which prevail among these islands,
+had drifted into the harbour of Porne, where an attack had been made
+upon her, and she, being short of ammunition, has been taken as a
+lawful prize. The Spaniards had been allowed to depart in their boats.
+So, for the second time, Donna Isabel and her people were probably
+castaways upon some unknown shore.
+
+Thus does Providence reward treachery.
+
+When, in the course of three days, the messengers returned with the
+King's ransom, we sent his Majesty ashore, to find his way back to his
+own kingdom as best he could. A more splendid lot of pearls than those
+paid to us I had never seen, and these we divided equally between the
+"Golden Seahorse" and the "Speedwell", to be allotted among the
+officers and crews of both vessels in such proportions as might be
+decided upon on our return to Amsterdam. The stone ballast, which, as
+we expected, turned out to be the gold-bearing quartz we had obtained
+from the island of Armenio, we transferred to our own ship.
+
+And now, with a cargo which for richness had surely never been
+surpassed, we once more set sail for home.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER LII
+
+CONCLUSION
+
+
+As we neared Amsterdam I began to think, with some trepidation, of my
+inevitable meeting with Pauline. It was now three years since I had set
+out upon my second voyage in the "Golden Seahorse", compelled to this
+course by reason of the incompatibility of temper which existed between
+my wife and me, making a happy union between us impossible. Yet when I
+took myself to task I could not but blame myself for much that had
+occurred. Pauline was vain, but so are most women, and most men too for
+that matter, for while a woman seeks admiration for her personal charms
+a man is equally proud of his achievements, and he is never so happy as
+when he is being praised for what he has done. So, on reviewing the
+matter of our matrimonial squabbles calmly and dispassionately, I came
+to the conclusion that there had been faults on both sides, and I made
+up my mind to be more conciliatory and less exacting in my conduct
+toward Pauline in the future, hoping by these means to effect a
+reconciliation so that I might live with some degree of comfort in my
+own house. To this end also I resolved to give Pauline my share of the
+pearls aid as ransom by King Thedori, in order that she might possess a
+necklace unequalled at Amsterdam. Besides which I had my rubies.
+
+Hartog also had become graver and more reserved than was his habit
+before we had set out upon this voyage. He seemed to regret the
+well-deserved fate which had overtaken Donna Isabel Barreto, and he
+would have asked nothing better than to set off on a voyage of
+discovery in search of her.
+
+So it was with subdued and chastened spirits that Hartog and I arrived
+at Amsterdam, where it was arranged that Hartog should dispose of our
+rich cargo and apportion the profits of the venture. As a peace
+offering to Pauline I took with me twenty splendid pearls and six
+silver fox-skins, and, thus provided, I presented myself at my house
+at Amsterdam, to which I was at first denied admittance by the
+man-servant, who opened the door to me, and who had no knowledge of
+my identity.
+
+While we were arguing the matter; however, Pauline appeared in the
+hall, into which I advanced to meet her. She was changed, I thought,
+and her face had wonderfully softened. I held out my arms to her, and
+she came to me, nestling into my embrace as though she indeed belonged
+to me. Then she rested her head upon my shoulder, and gave way to
+tears. I was touched by this kindly greeting, and had begun to mentally
+upbraid myself for my former conduct, and to promise amendment in the
+future, when the cause of my wife's changed disposition was suddenly,
+in a flash, revealed to me by a series of yells from a room upstairs,
+accompanied by a low voice of pleading in remonstrance, and what
+sounded like the, throwing about of some hard substance on the floor.
+
+I looked into my wife's eyes, and read in them the secret of the great
+happiness which had come to me.
+
+"He is quarrelling with his nurse," she said, smiling up at me through
+her tears. "He is such a masterful baby."
+
+Next moment I was bounding up the stairs, and on entering the nursery I
+saw my boy seated on the floor, his face red with passion, while with
+his chubby little hands he was tearing the sails off a toy ship that
+had been given him to play with. The clever lad, even in his infancy,
+must have noticed that the wretched apology for a ship which they
+offered him was not rigged in seaman-like fashion. Well, I promised
+myself that I would make him a model of the "Golden Seahorse", perfect
+in every detail, and big enough for him to sail in. When I came into
+the nursery he stopped crying and looked at me, but the nurse kept on
+saying, "Oh, Master Peter, Master Peter, you must not be naughty like
+that," as though she were repeating a formula.
+
+I ran to Master Peter and picked him up, when he tried to bite my hard
+hand with his little pearly teeth. Ah, what a lad of spirit he was! He
+was not a bit afraid of me or of anyone. A boy after my own heart. Then
+he looked at me, and the passion in his rosy face melted into a dimpled
+smile. He knew me, I am certain of it, and putting his little arms
+round my neck, he seemed to ask pardon for his wilfulness. We were
+comrades from that moment, he and I, and although not a word was spoken
+we understood each other thoroughly.
+
+Pauline and the nurse watched us. Both women were weeping, as is the
+way with women when they seek to relieve their feelings. But the tears
+they shed were tears of joy.
+
+When we were more composed, Pauline and I and young Peter went together
+to look at the presents I had brought back with me. Pauline was
+delighted with the pearls and the fox-skins, but she at once decided
+that the skins would make a warm winter coat for baby, and a splendid
+rug for his little carriage. I believe she would have given Master
+Peter the pearls to play with had he shown a fancy for them, but
+fortunately he did not notice them, so taken up was he in burying his
+face in the thick fur of the silver fox-skins.
+
+What a home-coming this was for me after so much tossing upon the
+ocean, and so many wanderings into unknown lands, and how I trembled
+when I thought on the dangers I had passed, and how easily I might have
+lost my life, and thus forfeited the happiness that I knew was in store
+for me!
+
+Well, my voyages were over now. Never again would I leave my wife and
+child for the hazards of the sea.
+
+When I told Hartog of my great good fortune he was warm in his
+congratulations. I took my boy on board the "Golden Seahorse", and
+presented him to Hartog.
+
+"We must make a sailor of him," said Hartog, when he had sat Master
+Peter upon the table between us in the cabin. "He is a sturdy lad, and
+has the look in his eyes that seeks for space--the look of the sailor,
+whose natural home is the sea."
+
+Could it be? Who can tell? Little Peter had a steadfast, far-off look
+in his eyes. I had not noticed it until Hartog directed my attention to
+it. Was it the call of the ocean? The call to the Dutch, and the
+English--seeking for space?
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK ADVENTURES IN SOUTHERN SEAS***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 16704.txt or 16704.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/6/7/0/16704
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
+paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works. See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+ the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+ you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is
+ owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+ has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+ Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments
+ must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+ prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+ returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+ sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+ address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+ the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+ you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+ does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+ License. You must require such a user to return or
+ destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+ and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+ Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+ money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+ electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+ of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+ distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+ Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+ Chief Executive and Director
+ gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations. To donate, please visit:
+https://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+ https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/16704.zip b/16704.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a4b1153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/16704.zip
Binary files differ
diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6312041
--- /dev/null
+++ b/LICENSE.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements,
+metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be
+in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES.
+
+Procedures for determining public domain status are described in
+the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org.
+
+No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in
+jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize
+this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright
+status under the laws that apply to them.
diff --git a/README.md b/README.md
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..9c7cd14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/README.md
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for
+eBook #16704 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/16704)